From 1ede6fca8198bebb44106abace1cde6e5aa8e57f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: ottjk <joshott16@gmail.com>
Date: Sun, 7 Jan 2024 14:16:36 -0500
Subject: removed unused latex stuff

---
 texmf/source/latex/revtex/revtex4-2.dtx | 8383 -------------------------------
 1 file changed, 8383 deletions(-)
 delete mode 100644 texmf/source/latex/revtex/revtex4-2.dtx

(limited to 'texmf/source/latex/revtex/revtex4-2.dtx')

diff --git a/texmf/source/latex/revtex/revtex4-2.dtx b/texmf/source/latex/revtex/revtex4-2.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index f6e0b1c..0000000
--- a/texmf/source/latex/revtex/revtex4-2.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8383 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment balanced on line 122
-% revtex4-2.dtx: package to typeset APS, AIP, SOR, ASA, etc. journal articles
-% Copyright (c) 2019 American Physical Society.
-% https://journals.aps.org/revtex/
-% mailto:revtex@aps.org
-%
-% Disclaimer
-%   This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
-%   without even the implied warranty of
-%   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-% License
-%   You may distribute this file under the conditions of the 
-%   LaTeX Project Public License 1.3c or later 
-%   (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
-% ReadMe
-%   For the documentation and more detailed instructions for
-%   installation, typeset this document with \LaTeX.
-% Maintenance Status
-%   This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained";
-%   Current Maintainer of this work is Arthur Ogawa.
-%
-% This work consists of the main source file revtex4-2.dtx
-% and the derived files
-%    revtex4-2.cls, revtex4-2.pdf
-% Distribution:
-%    CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/revtex/
-%
-% Unpacking:
-%    tex revtex4-2.dtx
-%
-% Documentation:
-%    latex revtex4-2.dtx; ...
-%
-%    Programm calls to get the documentation (example):
-%       pdflatex revtex4-2.dtx
-%       makeindex -s gind.ist revtex4-2.idx
-%       makeindex -s gglo.ist -o revtex4-2.gls revtex4-2.glo
-%       pdflatex revtex4-2.dtx
-%       makeindex -s gind.ist revtex4-2.idx
-%       pdflatex revtex4-2.dtx
-%
-% Installation:
-%    TDS:bibtex/bst/revtex/
-%    TDS:doc/latex/revtex/
-%    TDS:tex/latex/revtex/
-%    TDS:source/latex/revtex/
-%
-% Thanks, Heiko!
-%    This method of letting a single .dtx file serve as both
-%    documentation (via latex) and installer (via tex) follows
-%    the example of Heiko Oberdiek. Thanks!
-%<*ignore>
-\begingroup
-  \def\x{LaTeX2e}%
-\expandafter\endgroup
-\ifcase
- 0\expandafter\ifx\csname processbatchFile\endcsname\relax\else1\fi\ifx\fmtname\x\else 1\fi
- \relax
-\else
- \csname fi\endcsname
-%</ignore>
-%<*install>
-%% This file will generate documentation and runtime files
-%% from revtex4-2.dtx when run through TeX.
-\input docstrip
-\preamble
-
-This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4 distribution.
-For the version number, search on the string %FileInfo
-
-Original version by David Carlisle
-Modified by Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal dot net)
-
-Version (4.2a, unreleased)
-Modified by Aptara on behalf of American Physical Society and American Institute of Physics
-
-Version (4.2b,4.2c)
-Modified by Mark Doyle, American Physical Society (mailto:revtex at aps.org)
-
-Version (4.2d,4.2e)
-Modified by Phelype Oleinik for the American Physical Society (mailto:phelype.oleinik at latex-project.org)
-
-Copyright (c) 2019--2020 American Physical Society.
-https://journals.aps.org/revtex/
-mailto:revtex@aps.org
-
-See the REVTeX 4.2 README-REVTEX file for restrictions and more information.
-
-\endpreamble
-\askforoverwritefalse
-\keepsilent
-\generate{%
-  \file{revtex4-2.cls}{%
-   \from{revtex4-2.dtx}{kernel}%
-   \from{ltxutil.dtx}{kernel}%
-   \from{ltxfront.dtx}{kernel}%
-   \from{ltxgrid.dtx}{kernel}%
-   \from{revtex4-2.dtx}{options}%
-   \from{ltxutil.dtx}{options}%
-   \from{ltxfront.dtx}{options}%
-   \from{ltxgrid.dtx}{options}%
-   \from{revtex4-2.dtx}{package}%
-  }%
-  \file{aps4-2.rtx}{\from{revtex4-2.dtx}{aps}}%
-  \file{apsrmp4-2.rtx}{\from{revtex4-2.dtx}{rmp}}%
-  \file{aps10pt4-2.rtx}{\from{revtex4-2.dtx}{10pt}}%
-  \file{aps11pt4-2.rtx}{\from{revtex4-2.dtx}{11pt}}%
-  \file{aps12pt4-2.rtx}{\from{revtex4-2.dtx}{12pt}}%
-  \file{revsymb4-2.sty}{\from{revtex4-2.dtx}{revsymb}}%
-}%
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation, please move}
-\Msg{*    *.cls, *.rtx, and *.sty }
-\Msg{* into a directory searched by TeX;}
-\Msg{* in a TDS-compliant installation:}
-\Msg{* texmf/tex/macros/latex/revtex/.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation,
-       run revtex4-2.dtx through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-\endbatchfile
-%</install>
-%<*ignore>
-\fi
-%</ignore>
-% \fi
-%
-% \GetFileInfo{revtex4-2.dtx}
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
-%<*package>
-%%%  @LaTeX-file{
-%%%     filename        = "revtex4-2.dtx",
-%%%     version         = "4.2e",
-%%%     date            = "2020/10/03",
-%%%     author          = "Mark Doyle (mailto: revtex at aps.org), Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net),
-%%%                        commissioned by the American Physical Society.
-%%%                        ",
-%%%     copyright       = "Copyright (C) 1999, 2009 Arthur Ogawa, Version 4.2 Copyright (C) 2019 American Physical Society
-%%%                        distributed under the terms of the 
-%%%                        LaTeX Project Public License 1.3c, see
-%%%                        ftp://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt
-%%%                        ",
-%%%     address         = "Mark Doyle,
-%%%                        USA",
-%%%     telephone       = "",
-%%%     FAX             = "",
-%%%     email           = "mailto colon revtex at aps.org",
-%%%     codetable       = "ISO/ASCII",
-%%%     keywords        = "",
-%%%     supported       = "yes",
-%%%     abstract        = "",
-%%%  }
-%</package>
-% \fi
-%
-% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
-% The following references the \file{README-REVTEX.tex} file,
-% which contains the frontmatter for the programmer's docs.
-% The contents of this file are generated when
-% you typeset this file with LaTeX.
-% Search on "{filecontents*}{README-REVTEX.tex}" to locate it.
-% \fi\input{README-REVTEX.tex}%
-%
-% \subsection{Bill of Materials}
-%
-% Following is a list of the files in this distribution arranged
-% according to provenance.
-%
-% \subsubsection{Primary Source}%
-% One single file generates all.
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%revtex4-2.dtx
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{tex revtex4-2.dtx}}%
-% Typesetting ths file under \TeX\ itself runs the installer, 
-% which generates the package files.
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%revtex4-2.cls, revtex4.ins, revtex4.drv, aps4-2.rtx, 
-%aps10pt4-2.rtx, aps11pt4-2.rtx, aps12pt4-2.rtx, revsymp.sty
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{pdflatex revtex4-2.dtx}}%
-% Typesetting the source file under \LaTeX\
-% generates the documentation.
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%revtex4.pdf, 
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Auxiliary}%
-% The following are auxiliary files generated
-% in the course of running \LaTeX:
-% \begin{verbatim}
-%revtex4.aux revtex4.idx revtex4.ind revtex4.log revtex4.toc
-% \end{verbatim}
-%
-% \section{Code common to all modules}%
-%
-% The following may look a bit klootchy, but we
-% want to require only one place in this file
-% where the version number is stated,
-% and we also want to ensure that the version
-% number is embedded into every generated file.
-%
-% Now we declare that
-% these files can only be used with \LaTeXe.
-% An appropriate message is displayed if
-% a different \TeX{} format is used.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%<*doc|kernel|aps|rmp|revsymb>
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/12/01]%
-%</doc|kernel|aps|rmp|revsymb>
-%<kernel>\ProvidesClass{revtex4-2}
-%<aps>\ProvidesFile{aps4-2}
-%<rmp>\ProvidesFile{apsrmp4-2}
-%<10pt>\ProvidesFile{aps10pt4-2}
-%<11pt>\ProvidesFile{aps11pt4-2}
-%<12pt>\ProvidesFile{aps12pt4-2}
-%<revsymb>\ProvidesPackage{revsymb4-2}
-%<*doc>
-\ProvidesFile{revtex4-2.dtx}
-%</doc>
-%<*!package&!options>
-%<version>
- [2020/10/03 4.2e (https://journals.aps.org/revtex/ for documentation)]% \fileversion
-%</!package&!options>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The current class name is remembered in \cmd\class@name.
-% This is something of a klootch, relying as it does on knowledge of the implementation of \cmd\ProvidesPackage.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%<kernel>\let\class@name\@gtempa
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \section{The driver module \texttt{driver}}
-%
-% This module, consisting of the present section,
-% typesets the programmer's documentation,
-% generating the \file{README-REVTEX.txt} and sample document as needed.
-%
-% Because the only uncommented-out lines of code at the beginning of
-% this file constitute the \file{driver} module itself,
-% we can simply typeset the \file{.dtx} file directly,
-% and there is thus rarely any need to
-% generate the ``driver'' {\sc docstrip} module.
-% Module delimiters are nonetheless required so that
-% this code does not find its way into the other modules.
-%
-% The \enve{document} command concludes the typesetting run.
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%<*doc>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The driver uses packages \file{ltxdoc.sty}, \file{ltxdocext.sty}, 
-% \file{hyperref.sty}, and whatever font package has been selected.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\RequirePackage{ltxdocext}%
-\let\url\undefined
-\RequirePackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% We ask for the usual indices and glossaries.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs % makeindex -s gind.ist revtex4
-\RecordChanges % makeindex -s gglo.ist -o revtex4.gls revtex4.glo
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Docstrip and info directives}
-%    We use so many {\sc docstrip} modules that we set the
-%    \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    The following command retrieves the date and version information
-%    from this file.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\GetFileInfo\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{The Frontmatter File}
-% As promised above, here is the contents of the frontmatter file. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{filecontents*}{README-REVTEX.tex}
-\title{%
- The \classname{revtex4-2} document class of the American Physical Society%
- \protect\thanks{Work under hire to American Physical Society. Version \fileversion\ \copyright\ 2019 American Physical Society}%
-}%
-\author{Arthur Ogawa and Mark Doyle%
- \protect\thanks{First revision of REV\TeX4.0 (unreleased) by David Carlisle, all released versions of 4.0 and 4.1 by Art Ogawa, 4.2a (unreleased) by Aptara, 4.2b,c by Mark Doyle}%
-}%
-\date{Version \fileversion, dated \filedate}%
-\newcommand\revtex{REV\TeX}
-
-\maketitle
-
-This file embodies the implementation of the APS \revtex\ 4.2 document class
-for electronic submissions to journals.
-
-The distribution point for this work is
-\url{https://journals.aps.org/revtex/},
-which contains fully unpacked, prebuilt runtime files and documentation.
-
-\tableofcontents
-
-\section{Using \protect\revtex}
-
-The file \file{README} has retrieval and installation information.
-
-User documentation is presented separately in \file{auguide.tex}.
-
-The file \file{template.aps} is a boilerplate file. 
-
-\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/16}{Initial version}
-\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so \cs{clearpage} not in scope of twocolumn}
-\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Rearrange the ordering so numerical ones come first. AO: David, what does this mean?}
-\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{use font-dependent spacing}
-\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{4.0d had twoside option setting twoside switch to false}
-\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so the following test works}
-\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{print homepage}
-\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{protect against hyperref revtex kludges which are not needed now}
-\changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{multiple preprint commands}
-\changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{comma not space between email and homepage}
-\changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{single space footnotes}
-\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{First modifications by Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur\_ogawa at sbcglobal dot net)}
-\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{figuresname}}
-\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{tablesname}}
-\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{10pt} is in this module.}
-\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{11pt} is in this module.}
-\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{12pt} is in this module.}
-\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: made aps.rtx part of revtex4.dtx}
-\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: remove duplicates}
-\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{call \cs{print@floats}}
-\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer assignment until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}
-\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer decision until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
-\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Define three separate environments, defer assignment to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}
-\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Frank Mittelbach, has stated in \protect\classname{multicol}: ``The kernel command \cs{@footnotetext} should not be modified.'' Thus, I have removed David Carlisle's redefinition of that command. Note, however, that later versions of \protect\classname{multicol} do not require this workaround. Belt and suspenders.}%
-\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Move this ``complex'' option to the front, where it can be overridden by ``simple'' options.}
-\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{New option}
-\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{One-line caption sets flush left.}
-\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{only execute if appropriate}
-\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Processing delayed to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
-\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Removed invocation of nonexistent class option \protect\classoption{groupauthors} and all other class options that should only be invoked by the document. (Otherwise precedence of class options does not work.)}
-\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Restore all media size class option of \protect\file{classes.dtx}}
-\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Stack \cs{preprint} args flush right at right margin.}
-\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 115) If three or more preprints specified, set on single line, with commas.}
-\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 129) section* within appendix was producing appendixname}
-\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{*-form mandates pagebreak}
-\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{also spelled ``acknowledgements''.}
-\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Do not put by REVTeX in every page foot}
-\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes via ltxgrid procedures}
-\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid}
-\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Insert procedure \cs{checkindate}}
-\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Lose compatability mode.}
-\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{New ltxgrid-based  code, other bug fixes}
-\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{New option ``checkin''}
-\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Prevent an inner footnote from performing twice}
-\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{Also alter how lists get indented.}
-\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{eprint takes an optional argument, syntactical only in this case.}
-\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{New option}
-\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/10}{More features and bug fixes: compatability with longtable and array packages. Now certainly incompatible with multicol.}
-\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/17}{make longtable trigger the head, too}
-\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/18}{But alternative spelling is deprecated.}
-\changes{4.0e}{2000/09/20}{New option showkeys}
-\changes{4.0e}{2000/11/14}{Bug fixes and minor new features: title block affiliations can have ancillary data, just like authors; clearpage processing revamped, with floats staying in order; widetext ornaments.}
-\changes{4.0e}{2000/11/21}{adornments above and below.}
-\changes{4.0f}{2001/02/13}{Last bug fixes before release.}
-\changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/17}{Running headers always as if two-sided}
-\changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop}
-\changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop}
-\changes{4.0rc4}{2001/07/23}{hyperref is no longer loaded via class option: use a usepackage statement instead}
-\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
-\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 451) ``Cannot have more than 256 cites in a document''}%
-\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
-\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 460) ``Proper style is "FIG. 1. ..." (no colon)''}%
-\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 478) \cs{ds@letterpaper}, so that ``letterpaper really is the default''}%
-\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 488) Change processing of options to allow an unused option to specify society and journal}%
-\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 461) Change the csname revtex uses from @dotsep to ltxu@dotsep. The former is understood in mu. (What we wanted was a dimension.)}%
-\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{For natbib versions before 8.21, \cs{NAT@sort} was consulted only as natbib was being read in. Now it is fully dynamic.}
-\changes{4.1b}{2008/05/29}{The csname substyle@ext is now defined without a dot (.), to be compatible with \LaTeX usage (see @clsextension and @pkgextension).}
-\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{(AO) Implement bibnotes through \cs{frontmatter@footnote@produce} instead of \cs{bibnotes@sw}}%
-\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{Add option reprint, opposite of preprint, and preferred alternative to twocolumn}
-\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).}
-\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/30}{(AO) Structure the Abstract using the \texttt{bibliography} environment}
-\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) coordinate \cs{if@twoside} with \cs{twoside@sw}}
-\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
-\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer need to test \cs{chapter} as of \texttt{natbib} version 8.2}
-\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer use \cs{secnumarabic@sw}, instead use \cs{setup@secnums}}
-\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) Provide more diagnostics when \cs{@society} is assigned.}
-\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) provide option longbibliography}
-\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Add \cs{@hangfroms@section}}
-\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Break out \cs{@caption@fignum@sep}}
-\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Class option galley sets \cs{preprintsty@sw} to false}
-\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Code relating to new syntax for frontmatter has been placed in \file{ltxfront.dtx}}
-\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Package textcase is now simply a required package}
-\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Procedures \cs{@parse@class@options@society} and \cs{@parse@class@options@journal} and friends}
-\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
-\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Remove options newabstract and oldabstract}
-\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/01}{Section numbering via procedures \cs{secnums@rtx} and \cs{secnums@arabic}.}
-\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{As with author formatting, rag the right more, and assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}. Also neutralize \cs{def@after@address}.}%
-\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Rag the right even more: .8\cs{hsize}. Also, assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}.}%
-\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{The \texttt{rmp} journal substyle selects \texttt{groupedaddress} by default.}%
-\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Use \cs{setup@hook} to initialize all.}
-\changes{4.1c}{2008/08/15}{Document class option longbibliography via \cs{substyle@post}}
-\changes{4.1d}{2009/03/27}{Definition of \cs{	@fnsymbol} follows fixltx2e.sty}
-\changes{4.1e}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) be nice to a list within the abstract}
-\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 513) Add class option linenumbers: number the lines a la \classname{lineno}}
-\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 516) Merged references are separated with a semicolon}
-\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
-\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 521) Lonely bibliography head}%
-\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 522) Warn if software is expired}%
-\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/15}{(AO, 523) Add class option nomerge, to turn off new natbib 8.3 syntax}
-\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/20}{(AO, 524) Makes no sense if citations are superscript numbers and so are footnotes}
-\changes{4.1f}{2009/10/05}{(AO, 530) \cs{@fnsymbol}: Failed to import fixltx2e.sty technology. Return to LaTeX core.}
-\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 525) Remove phantom paragraph above display math that is given in vertical mode}%
-\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 538) \cs{MakeTextUppercase} inappropriately expands the double backslash}
-\changes{4.1h}{2009/10/09}{(AO) Remove expiry code in the release software}%
-\changes{4.1i}{2009/10/23}{(AO, 541) Defer assignment of \cs{cite} until after natbib loads}
-\changes{4.1j}{2009/10/24}{(AO, 549) Repairing natbib's \cs{BibitemShut} and \cs{bibAnnote}}
-\changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 545) hypertext capabilities off by default; enable with \classoption{hypertext}}
-\changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 552) Repair spacing in \cs{onlinecite}}
-\changes{4.1k}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 554) give the \cs{newlabel} command syntax appropriate to the hyperref package}
-\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 565) restore 4.0 behavior: invoking class option preprint implies class option preprintnumbers}
-\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 566) restore 4.0 behavior: flush column bottoms}
-\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/05}{(AO, 569) Use of \classname{hyperref} interferes with column balancing of last page}%
-\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/09}{(AO, 569) execute the after-last-shipout procedures from within the safety of the output routine}%
-\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Interface \cs{set@footnotewidth} for determining the set width of footnotes}%
-\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
-\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/13}{(AO, 573) arrange to load \classname{lineno} after any other packages.}%
-\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/04}{(AO, 575) the default for journal prstper is longbibliography}%
-\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/04}{(AO, 576) In .bst files, remove support for the annote field}%
-\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO) fine-tune spacing above and below widetext}%
-\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
-\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) \cs{@makefntext} and \cs{frontmatter@makefntext} must be defined harmoniously}%
-\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/02}{(AO, 575) Automatically incorporate the (Bib\TeX-generated) .bbl into an explicit \env{thebibliography}}%
-\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 549) Remove patch to natbib, which is now at version 8.31a}
-\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/07}{(AO, 578) accommodate the possible space character preceding \cs{BibitemShut}.} 
-\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 579) Endnote shall comprise their own Bib\TeX\ entry type: @FOOTNOTE.} 
-\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/10}{(AO, 580) Provide a document class option to turn off production of eprint field in bibliography.} 
-\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}%
-\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/09}{(AO, 581) Handle case: merged references, with first ending in a stop character.} 
-\changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 583) Provide interface to \classname{ltxgrid} \cs{onecolumn@grid@setup} and \cs{twocolumn@grid@setup}} 
-\changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 584) Per MD, remove trailing space character from each journal abbreviation: it had caused an extraneous space in the .bbl} 
-\changes{4.1q}{2010/04/01}{(AO, 586) When .bbl is pasted into the document, prevent automatic bibliography inclusion.}%
-\changes{4.1q}{2010/04/13}{(AO, 588) Only write \revtex-specific BibTeX .bib data if the .bst style is set by REVTeX.}%
-\changes{4.1r}{2010/06/22}{(AO, 595) Provide \cs{lovname} along with other List of Videos definitions.}%
-\changes{4.2a}{2014/12/31}{(Aptara, MD) Added initial support for SOR and AAPM journals, additional journals for APS, and additional journals and proceedings for AIP, unreleased.}%
-\changes{4.2a}{2014/12/31}{(Aptara) Make prb style to follow other Phys. Rev. journals.}%
-\changes{4.2a}{2014/12/31}{(Aptara) Corrected indentation for tableofcontents appearing along with listoffigure/listoftable.}%
-\changes{4.2a}{2017/11/21}{(MD) Make long bibliography style the default now.}%
-\changes{4.2a}{2017/11/28}{(MD) Add call to normalsize to be a good citizen and allow booktabs.sty to work properly}.%
-\changes{4.2b}{2018/12/26}{(MD) Make titles in bibliography default, prb style to follow other Phys. Rev. journals, add a unified physrev option as well as prx and prapplied options. Corrected indentation for tableofcontents appearing along with listoffigure/listoftable.}%
-\changes{4.2b}{2017/11/21}{(MD) Update options for new titles without "Special Topics" and make prper match style of other journal options}%
-\changes{4.2b}{2017/11/21}{(MD) Add options for new APS journals and a generic physrev option for future-proofing}%
-\changes{4.2b}{2017/11/22}{(MD) Change default to not use a title page - it seems antiquated}%
-\changes{4.2b}{2017/11/22}{(MD) MD - not sure why these parameters were different previously. Made them match except for title.}%
-\changes{4.2b}{2017/11/22}{(MD) PACS are obsolete altogether now}%
-\changes{4.2b}{2018/12/26}{(MD) Improve control over display of e-print ids in bibliography.}%
-
-\end{filecontents*}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{The Document Body}
-%
-% Here is the document body, containing only a
-% \cmd\DocInput\ directive---referring to this very file.
-% This very cute self-reference is a common \classname{ltxdoc} idiom.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%%\newcommand\revtex{REV\TeX}% TeXSupport
-\begin{document}%
-\expandafter\DocInput\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
-\PrintChanges
-\end{document}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% And that is the end of the driver for the programmer's documentation.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%</doc>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \section{Overview}%
-% \revtex\ is a \LaTeXe\ document class, somewhat like a hybrid of 
-% the standard \LaTeX\ \classname{book} and \classname{article} classes.
-%
-% Certain packages are (should be) loaded by this class in any case:
-% \classname{amssymb}, \classname{amsmath}, \classname{bm}, \classname{natbib}.
-% 
-% Certain packages are automatically loaded by this class
-% when a corresponding class option has been invoked:
-% 
-% \begin{tabular}{ll}
-% \textbf{\revtex\ option}&\textbf{package}\\
-% \classoption{amsfonts}&\classname{amsfonts}\\
-% \classoption{amssymb}&\classname{amssymb}\\
-% \classoption{aps}&\classname{overcite}\\
-% \end{tabular}
-%
-% Certain other packages are to be loaded by the
-% document through explicit use of \cmd\usepackage.
-% Some mentioned in the user documentation are
-% \classname{graphicx}, \classname{longtable}, \classname{hyperref}, 
-% and \classname{bm}.
-%
-% Certain commonly used packages are known to be incompatible with
-% \revtex, among them \classname{multicol} and \classname{cite}.
-% If such a package is found to be loaded, \revtex\ issues an error message
-% and halts the job.
-% Halting might be considered severe punishment for loading an incompatible 
-% package, but if we were to proceed, an even weirder error might be encountered
-% further down the road.
-%
-% This document class implements the substyle: a set of mutually
-% exclusive class options that, in this case, allow the 
-% document class to address multiple societies.
-% It also implements a sub-substyle, giving the 
-% journal of the given society.
-% Any society may create a substyle;
-% this file generates one for \classoption{aps}.
-%
-% FIXME: should always load the \classname{graphicx} package. No, allow user to load whichever graphics package is desired.
-% 
-% QUERY: since \classname{amsfonts} and \classname{amssymb} extend
-% syntax, why not load them in any case?
-% 
-% Certain processing occurs at the endgame for reading in \revtex, thereby establishing
-% precedence for assignments to \LaTeX's (and \revtex's) parameters:
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item
-%  Figure out which society is operative and read in the indicated \file{.rtx} file.
-% \item
-%  Figure out which journal option is operative and execute the indicated journal command. This may lead to reading in a journal substyle \file{.rtx} file.
-% \item
-%  Figure out which pointsize is operative and execute the indicateded pointsize command. This may lead to reading in a pointsize  \file{.rtx} file.
-% \item
-%  Execute all of the document's options, in the order declared within the document.
-% \item
-%  Read in all required packages (like \classname{natbib}, \classname{amsfonts}, \classname{amssymb}), that were determined by class, society, and journal.
-% \item
-%  The last required package, if existing, is the document's style file, the \file{.rty} file. 
-%  Note that the \file{.rty} file can override the assignments of \revtex, society, journal, and required packages, and even load its own packages.
-%  It can also, via appendations to \cmd\setup@hook, override the setup code itself.
-% \item
-%  Execute all of the setup code accumulated. Such code can be queued by \revtex\ itself, by the society, by the journal, or by the pointsize. 
-% \item
-%  At this point, \revtex\ has completed the process of inputting itself, 
-%  and \LaTeX\ will now execute the \cmd\AtEndOfClass\ procedures.
-% \end{enumerate}
-%
-% \revtex\ will have enqueued code to execute at \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time,
-% in two different queues. 
-% \cmd\document@inithook\ executes immediately upon encountering the \cmd\begin\env{document} statement, 
-% \cmd\class@documenthook\ at the end of all the code enqueued via \cmd\AtBeginDocument. 
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item
-%  Install procedures to execute at the very end of the class's
-%  \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ processing, such as
-%  \begin{enumerate}
-%  \item
-%   closing out the page grid
-%  \item
-%   putting out the LastPage label.
-%  \item
-%   issuing a \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command, based on the value set
-%   by the society substyle.
-%  \item
-%   setting default values for parameters used in the document.
-%FIXME: differentiate between class's parameters that can wait until
-% they are used in the document, and parameters that are used at \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time.
-%  \end{enumerate}
-% \item
-%  Install procedures to execute the very last at \cmd\AtEndDocument\ time,
-%  such as the \cmd\clearpage\ processing.
-% \end{enumerate}
-%
-% Certain events are optionally scheduled for \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time:
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item
-%  Setting default values for the Booleans and for other procedures used in formatting.
-% \item
-%  In response to class options options, adjusting parameters and procedures used in formatting.
-% \item
-%  Implementing the \classoption{eqsecnum} option, if required.
-% \item
-%  Setting the state engine for data commands.
-% \item
-%  Memorizing procedures for later use.
-% \item
-%  Setting type size and area, for use by later calculations.
-% \end{enumerate}
-%
-% Certain events are scheduled for \cmd\class@enddocumenthook\ time:
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item
-%  Print out the migrated floats or the end notes, if needed.
-% \item
-%  Close out the page grid.
-% \item
-%  Label the last page of the document
-% \item
-%  (\classname{natbib}) prepare to read in the \file{.aux} file.
-% \end{enumerate}
-%
-% \section{Writing journal-specifc extensions to \revtex}
-%
-% With this version of \revtex, we introduce a somewhat different
-% scheme for adapting \revtex\ to the needs of a specific journal.
-%
-% To create a journal substyle, you create new class options in 
-% \revtex\ for the society, say \classoption{osa}, and any of that society's journals,
-% one of which is, say, \classoption{josaa},
-% using the code for the APS as a guide.
-% In particular, each of your new options should separately define \cmd\@society\
-% and \cmd\@journal. That for the former will be the same for
-% all options relating to a particular society.
-%
-% Then, for the society, you create a corresponding \file{.rtx}
-% file, in our case \file{osa.rtx}.
-% Within that file, you override procedures and parameter assignments as you see fit.
-% Ideally they will be generally applicable to all of that society's
-% journals (see the file \file{aps.rtx} for a realization of this scheme).
-% Also within that file, you include a 
-% section of code for each journal, that for josaa looks like:
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \@ifx{\@journal\journal@josaa}{%
-% <code specific to the josaa>
-% }{}%
-% \end{verbatim}
-% 
-% Thus far, the scheme is similar to that used in \revtex\ 3.1.
-% However, the new scheme does differ from the old in that 
-% the \file{.rtx} file should define no syntactical extensions
-% to \revtex.
-%
-% \section{The \classname{revtex4} Document Class}
-% Above, we took
-% advantage of 1) the \LaTeX\ definition of \cmd\ProvidesPackage\ and
-% 2) that the line of code immediately afterwards follows the \cmd\ProvidesClass\ statement above. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%<*kernel>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Print a banner in the log:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\GenericInfo{}{\space
- Copyright (c) 2019 American Physical Society.^^J
- mailto:revtex@aps.org^^J
- Licensed under the LPPL:^^Jhttp://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt^^J
- Arthur Ogawa <arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal dot net>^^J
- Based on work by David Carlisle <david at dcarlisle.demon.co.uk>^^J
- Version (4.2d,4.2e): Modified by Mark Doyle and Phelype Oleinik^^J
- \@gobble
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Compatibility Processing}
-%
-% If the document has \cmd\documentstyle|{revtex4}|,
-% then, instead of attempting to run in compatability mode,
-% just complain and exit.
-% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Lose compatability mode.}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\if@compatibility    
-  \edef\reserved@a{\errhelp{%
-   Change your \string\documentstyle\space statement to
-   \string\documentclass\space and rerun.
-  }}\reserved@a
-  \errmessage{You cannot run \class@name\space in compatability mode}%
-  \expandafter\@@end
-\fi
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \section{Extensions to the \LaTeX\ Kernel}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%</kernel>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Here, we incorporate the utility, frontmatter, and page grid packages.
-% The \classname{ltxutil}, \classname{ltxfront}, and \classname{ltxgrid} source are distributed with 
-% \revtex.
-%
-% Here begins the \file{options} \textsc{docstrip} module.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%<*options>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Hooks}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\setup@hook}
-% The procedure 
-% \cmd\setup@hook\
-% serves as the vehicle for all code that 
-% gives values to the class's parameters once all the 
-% society, journal, options, and packages have been processed. 
-%
-% Arrange for journal substyles to set their own default values.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\let\setup@hook\@empty
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% After preamble processing is complete,
-% detect whether package \classname{longtable} has been loaded and patch it.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\document@inithook{%
- \switch@longtable
- \let\LT@makecaption\LT@makecaption@rtx
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\LT@makecaption}
-% We override the caption processing method of the \classname{longtable} package:
-% space below the caption is created via strut instead of whitespace.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\LT@makecaption@rtx#1#2#3{%
-  \LT@mcol\LT@cols c{%
-    \hbox to\z@{%
-     \hss
-     \parbox[t]\LTcapwidth{%
-      \sbox\@tempboxa{#1{#2: }#3\unskip\nobreak\vrule\@width\z@\@height\z@\@depth .5\baselineskip}%
-      \ifdim\wd\@tempboxa>\hsize
-        #1{#2: }#3\unskip\nobreak\vrule\@width\z@\@height\z@\@depth .5\baselineskip
-      \else
-        \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
-      \fi
-      \endgraf
-     }%
-     \hss
-    }%
-  }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\robust@boldmath}
-% Robustify the \cmd\boldmath command. 
-% If Team \LaTeX\ (or any package) ever gets around to fixing this problem, 
-% we will bow out. (This fix relates to bug \#394.)
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\protectdef@boldmath{%
- \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname boldmath \endcsname{}{%
-  \class@info{Robustifying \string\LaTeX's \string\boldmath\space command}%
-  \expandafter\let\csname boldmath \endcsname\boldmath
-  \expandafter\def\expandafter\boldmath\expandafter{\expandafter\protect\csname boldmath \endcsname}%
- }%
-}%
-\appdef\document@inithook{%
- \protectdef@boldmath
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \section{Compatability with the geometry package}
-%
-% The \classname{geometry} package of Hideo Umeki provides a way to 
-% specify the metrics of the media and page layout.
-% We want to ensure that \revtex\ does not foreclose on the use of 
-% this or any other such package, nor to interfere with
-% explicit assignments of such metric parameters within the 
-% document preamble.
-% 
-% The \LaTeX\ parameters (resp. \TeX\ primitives) set by \classname{geometry} are:
-% \cmd\paperwidth, \cmd\paperheight, 
-% \cmd\textwidth, \cmd\textheight, 
-% \cmd\topmargin, \cmd\headheight, \cmd\headsep, 
-% \cmd\footskip, \cmd\skip\cmd\footins, 
-% \cmd\marginparwidth, \cmd\marginparsep, 
-% \cmd\oddsidemargin, \cmd\evensidemargin, 
-% \cmd\columnsep, 
-% \cmd\hoffset, \cmd\voffset, \cmd\mag, 
-% \cmd\if@twocolumn, \cmd\if@twoside, \cmd\if@mparswitch, \cmd\if@reversemargin, 
-%
-% \revtex's assignments can be overridden by 
-% any package or other statement in the document preamble, 
-% so it should be compatible. 
-%
-%FIXME: one parameter is rendered semantically void (by \file{ltxgrid.dtx}): 
-% \cmd\if@twocolumn. 
-%
-% \section{Options}\label{sec:options}%
-%
-% \subsection{Define Booleans Used in Options}%
-% The following Booleans are used within the document class to
-% allow the document or the substyle to make selections
-% of formatting.
-% An explicit document class option overrides an assignment made by a substyle.
-%
-% \subsection{Declare Options}%
-%
-% \subsubsection{Checkin: for Editorial Use}%
-% A document class option declaring that the document is being processed by the 
-% editorial staff.
-%
-% This option should:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item
-% put date in footer along with folio
-% \item
-% Have the effect of selecting the \classoption{preprint} class option.
-% \item
-% Have the effect of selecting the \classoption{showpacs} class option.
-% \item
-% specify that when a float is placed h or H, it will be allowed to break over pages.
-% (Note: be sure that if the enclosed \env{tabular} has an optional argument, you change it to [v], or remove it entirely.)
-% \end{itemize}
-% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{New option ``checkin''}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{checkin}{%
-  \@booleantrue\dateinRH@sw
-  \@booleantrue\preprintsty@sw
-  \def\@pointsize{12}%
-  \@booleantrue\showPACS@sw
-  \@booleantrue\showKEYS@sw
-  \def\fp@proc@h{\allow@breaking@tables}%
-  \def\fp@proc@H{\allow@breaking@tables}%
-}%
-\@booleanfalse\dateinRH@sw
-\def\checkindate{\dateinRH@sw{{\tiny(\today)}}{}}%
-\def\allow@breaking@tables{%
- \def\array@default{v}% tabular can break over pages
- \@booleanfalse\floats@sw % table can break over pages
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Preprint Style}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\preprintsty@sw}
-% The boolean \cmd\preprintsty@sw\ signifies that 
-% the document is to be formatted in preprint style.
-% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Rearrange the ordering so numerical ones come first. AO: David, what does this mean?}
-% \changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{comma not space between email and homepage}
-% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Move this ``complex'' option to the front, where it can be overridden by ``simple'' options.}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{Add option reprint, opposite of preprint, and preferred alternative to twocolumn}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{preprint}{%
- \@booleantrue\preprintsty@sw
- \ExecuteOptions{12pt}%
-}%
-\DeclareOption{reprint}{%
-\@booleanfalse\preprintsty@sw
-\@booleantrue\twocolumn@sw
- \ExecuteOptions{10pt}%
-}%
-\DeclareOption{manuscript}{%
- \class@warn{Document class option manuscript is obsolete; use preprint instead}%
- \ExecuteOptions{preprint}%
-}%
-\@booleanfalse\preprintsty@sw
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\showPACS@sw}
-% \begin{macro}{\showKEYS@sw}
-% If \cmd\showPACS@sw\ is true, print the PACS information in the title block,
-% otherwise not.
-% Similarly for \cmd\showKEYS@sw\ and the keywords.
-% \subsubsection{Showing PACS and keywords}%
-% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{New option}
-% \changes{4.0e}{2000/09/20}{New option showkeys}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{showpacs}{%
-  \@booleantrue\showPACS@sw
-}%
-\DeclareOption{noshowpacs}{%
-  \@booleanfalse\showPACS@sw
-}%
-\DeclareOption{showkeys}{%
-  \@booleantrue\showKEYS@sw
-}%
-\DeclareOption{noshowkeys}{%
-  \@booleanfalse\showKEYS@sw
-}%
-\@booleanfalse\showPACS@sw
-\@booleanfalse\showKEYS@sw
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Balance the last page when in two-column page grid}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\balancelastpage@sw}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
-% If we are in a two-column page grid, we may wish to balance the columns
-% of the last page. This will be done automatically if the 
-% \classoption{twocolumn} document class option is chosen.
-% This action will be turned off by the \classoption{nobalancelastpage}.
-% A complementary class option, \classoption{balancelastpage} is also provided.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{balancelastpage}{%
-  \@booleantrue\balancelastpage@sw
-}%
-\DeclareOption{nobalancelastpage}{%
-  \@booleanfalse\balancelastpage@sw
-}%
-\@booleantrue\balancelastpage@sw
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Showing preprint numbers}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\preprint@sw}
-% \changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{New option}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
-% \changes{4.1n}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 565) restore 4.0 behavior: default value of \cs{preprint@sw} follows \cs{preprintsty@sw}}
-% The boolean \cmd\preprint@sw\ signifies that 
-% the preprints (cf. \cmd\preprint) are to be formatted (usually on the title page).
-% The option \classoption{preprintnumbers} declares to do so,
-% \classoption{nopreprintnumbers} declares not to; 
-% the default is to follow \cmd\preprintsty@sw. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{nopreprintnumbers}{\@booleanfalse\preprint@sw}%
-\DeclareOption{preprintnumbers}{\@booleantrue\preprint@sw}%
-\appdef\setup@hook{%
- \@ifxundefined\preprint@sw{\let\preprint@sw\preprintsty@sw}{}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Hypertext Option}%
-%
-% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{protect against hyperref revtex kludges which are not needed now}
-% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Move this ``complex'' option to the front, where it can be overridden by ``simple'' options.}
-% \changes{4.0rc4}{2001/07/23}{hyperref is no longer loaded via class option: use a usepackage statement instead}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{hyperref}{%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The following code had been commented out, it is now truly a comment:
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-%\AtEndOfClass{%
-% \begingroup
-%  \edef\@tempa{%
-%   \let
-%   \noexpand\@clsextension
-%   \noexpand\@empty
-%   \noexpand\RequirePackage{hyperref}%
-%   \def\noexpand
-%   \@clsextension{\@clsextension}%
-%  }%
-%  \expandafter
-% \endgroup
-% \@tempa
-%}%
-% \def\@pointsize{10}%
-%    \end{verbatim}
-%
-% If you have a hyper-foo enabled browser you may prefer this format
-% which does not print the URL for the home page, but just makes the
-% name a link, but by default print it so it works on paper.
-% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{print homepage}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
- \class@warn{Class option "hyperref" is no longer supported.^^JEmploy \string\usepackage{hyperref} instead}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Type Size}%
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
-% Use \cmd\@pointsize|=10| rather than \cmd\@ptsize|=0| to allow easy extensions
-% to 9pt or whatever. 
-% Note: the three alternatives are mutually exclusive. 
-%
-% At this point, the parameter \cmd\@pointsize\ is set to \cmd\undefined:
-% a society \emph{must} give it a definition.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{10pt}{\def\@pointsize{10}}%
-\DeclareOption{11pt}{\def\@pointsize{11}}%
-\DeclareOption{12pt}{\def\@pointsize{12}}%
-\let\@pointsize\@undefined
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Media Size}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\paperheight}
-% \begin{macro}{\paperwidth}
-% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Restore all media size class option of \protect\file{classes.dtx}}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{a4paper}{%
-    \setlength\paperheight {297mm}%
-    \setlength\paperwidth  {210mm}%
-}%
-\DeclareOption{a5paper}{%
-    \setlength\paperheight {210mm}%
-    \setlength\paperwidth  {148mm}%
-}%
-\DeclareOption{b5paper}{%
-    \setlength\paperheight {250mm}%
-    \setlength\paperwidth  {176mm}%
-}%
-\DeclareOption{letterpaper}{%
-    \setlength\paperheight {11in}%
-    \setlength\paperwidth  {8.5in}%
-}%
-\DeclareOption{legalpaper}{%
-    \setlength\paperheight {14in}%
-    \setlength\paperwidth  {8.5in}%
-}%
-\DeclareOption{executivepaper}{%
-    \setlength\paperheight {10.5in}%
-    \setlength\paperwidth  {7.25in}%
-}%
-\DeclareOption{landscape}{%
-    \setlength\@tempdima   {\paperheight}%
-    \setlength\paperheight {\paperwidth}%
-    \setlength\paperwidth  {\@tempdima}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 478) \cs{ds@letterpaper}, so that ``letterpaper really is the default''}%
-% Effectively select \classoption{letterpaper}. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ds@letterpaper
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Bibnotes}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@footnote@produce}
-% Frontmatter footnotes result from frontmatter commands like
-% \cmd\email, \cmd\homepage, \cmd\altaffiliation, and \cmd\thanks.
-% The default for \cmd\frontmatter@footnote@produce\ is
-% \cmd\frontmatter@footnote@produce@footnote, which formats the frontmatter footnotes
-% at the foot of the title page. The \classoption{bibnotes} class option
-% defers them to the bibliography.
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{(AO) Implement bibnotes through \cs{frontmatter@footnote@produce} instead of \cs{bibnotes@sw}}%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{bibnotes}{\let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@endnote}%
-\DeclareOption{nobibnotes}{\let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@footnote}%
-\let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@footnote
-\appdef\class@enddocumenthook{\auto@bib}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Footinbib}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\footinbib@sw}
-% The boolean \cmd\footinbib@sw\ signifies that 
-% text footnotes are to be set in the bibliography, as endnotes.
-% 
-% The document may set the value one way or the other via
-% the following two class options.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{footinbib}{\@booleantrue\footinbib@sw}
-\DeclareOption{nofootinbib}{\@booleanfalse\footinbib@sw}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The default value is \cmd\false@sw, and the society or journal
-% may override the default. 
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@booleanfalse\footinbib@sw
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{altaffilletter}%
-% 
-% \begin{macro}{\altaffilletter@sw}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
-% Determine the procedure \cmd\thefootnote\ used in frontmatter: 
-% the footnote symbol used in titlepage footnotes.
-%     \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{altaffilletter}{\@booleantrue\altaffilletter@sw}%
-\DeclareOption{altaffilsymbol}{\@booleanfalse\altaffilletter@sw}%
-\@booleanfalse\altaffilletter@sw
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{superbib}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\place@bibnumber}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
-% The procedure \cmd\place@bibnumber\ produces the number
-% at the head of the \cmd\bibitem, in the bibliography.
-% By default, it has the \cmd\bibnumfmt\ meaning assigned by the \classname{natbib} package.
-% It may be overridden by society, journal, or by the document options.
-%
-%     \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{superbib}{%
- \let\place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber@sup
-}%
-\def\place@bibnumber{\NATx@bibnumfmt}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\place@bibnumber@sup}
-% \begin{macro}{\place@bibnumber@inl}
-% For producing the \cmd\bibitem\ device,
-% we define two procedures to select from.
-%
-% Note that we could have used \classname{natbib}'s \cmd\ifNAT@super\
-% switch, but it does not allow for altering the meaning of \cmd\bibnumfmt.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\place@bibnumber@sup#1{\textsuperscript{#1}}%
-\def\place@bibnumber@inl#1{[#1]}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{citeautoscript}%
-% \begin{macro}{\citeautoscript@sw}
-% This class option allows you to automatically accomodate a change from non-superscripted, numbered references
-% to superscripted, bunmbered references.
-%
-% Note: you should always mark up your document with the assumption that references are \emph{not} going to be superscripted.
-% Otherwise this option has no hope of working properly.
-%
-%     \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{citeautoscript}{\@booleantrue\citeautoscript@sw}%
-\@booleanfalse\citeautoscript@sw
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Variants on the Bibliography Style}%
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) provide option longbibliography}
-%
-% \revtex\ anticipates that a society or journal will provide two related Bib\TeX bibliography style variants,
-% designating one as the default.
-% A pair of document class options \classoption{longbibliography} and \classoption{nolongbibliography}
-% allows the user to explicitly select between them. 
-% \begin{macro}{\longbibliography@sw}
-%
-%\changes{4.2a}{2017/11/21}{(MD) Make long bibliography style the default now.}
-% \revtex's default for \cmd\longbibliography@sw\ is \cmd\true@sw.
-%
-%     \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{longbibliography}{\@booleantrue\longbibliography@sw}%
-\DeclareOption{nolongbibliography}{\@booleanfalse\longbibliography@sw}%
-\@booleantrue\longbibliography@sw
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\eprint@enable@sw}
-% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/10}{(AO, 580) Provide a document class option to turn off production of eprint field in bibliography.} 
-%
-% The document class options \classoption{eprint} and \classoption{noeprint}
-% give the user the ability to turn off production of the \texttt{eprint} field in the bibliography. 
-%     \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{eprint}{\@booleantrue\eprint@enable@sw}%
-\DeclareOption{noeprint}{\@booleanfalse\eprint@enable@sw}%
-\@booleantrue\eprint@enable@sw
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Simplex/Duplex Pages}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\twoside@sw}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) coordinate \cs{if@twoside} with \cs{twoside@sw}}
-% The flag \cmd\twoside@sw\ signifies that the document is to be 
-% formatted for duplex printing.
-% After the preamble is processed, we align the value
-% of the kernel \cmd\newif\ switch \cmd\if@twoside\ 
-% to that of \cmd\twoside@sw. 
-% \cmd\if@twoside\ itself is used in the kernel's
-% \cmd\cleardoublepage\ and \cmd\@outputpage\ procedures.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@booleanfalse\twoside@sw
-\appdef\document@inithook{%
- \twoside@sw{\@twosidetrue}{\@twosidefalse}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{4.d had twoside option setting twoside switch to false}
-% The complementary options \classoption{twoside} and \classoption{oneside}
-% assert formatting for duplex or simplex printing, respectively.
-% At the same time, we arrange for the selection of the page grid 
-% with respect to the marginal column:
-% Because \cmd\if@reversemargin\ remains default (false),
-% if duplex printing, this column will always be on the (right),
-% if simplex printing, it will always be on the (outside).
-% QUERY: correct choice?
-%FIXME: assign \cmd\if@mparswitch\ later (and protect the assignment, too). 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@booleantrue \twoside@sw\@mparswitchfalse}%
-\DeclareOption{oneside}{\@booleanfalse\twoside@sw\@mparswitchtrue}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Two-Column Page Grid}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\twocolumn@sw}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
-% \changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 583) Provide interface to \classname{ltxgrid} \cs{onecolumn@grid@setup} and \cs{twocolumn@grid@setup}} 
-% The flag \cmd\twocolumn@sw\ signifies that the document is to be 
-% formatted in the two-column page grid.
-%
-% If no options relating to page grid are invoked by 
-% \cmd\AtBeginDcoument\ time, we set default values.
-% Up to that point, the class can check if \cmd\twocolumn@sw\
-% is \cmd\undefined\ to see if any related options have been invoked.
-%
-% \classoption{onecolumn} specifies one-column page grid.
-% The \classoption{twocolumn} class option employs the standard mechanism for
-% changing the column grid: the \classname{ltxgrid} package.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\@booleanfalse\twocolumn@sw}%
-\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\@booleantrue\twocolumn@sw}%
-\@booleanfalse\twocolumn@sw
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The column grid is determined by the state of the switch \cmd\twocolumn@sw
-% and is effected at \cmd\class@documenthook\ time.
-% The society or journal file may re-define \cmd\select@column@grid\ 
-% to accomodate, e.g., more than two choices for the page grid. 
-%
-% Note that \cmd\open@column@two\ adds items to the Main Vertical List, 
-% so constitutes the true beginning of the document.
-%
-% Note also that if the selected column grid is a one-column grid, 
-% there is nothing to do, because \classname{ltxgrid} has already
-% set that up via \cmd\@begindocumenthook.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\select@column@grid{%
- \twocolumn@sw{%
-  \twocolumn@grid@setup
-  \open@twocolumn
- }{%
-  \onecolumn@grid@setup
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-% \open@onecolumn
-%    \end{verbatim}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
- }%
-}%
-\appdef\class@documenthook{%
- \select@column@grid
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\clear@document}
-% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/05}{(AO, 569) Use of \classname{hyperref} interferes with column balancing of last page}%
-%
-% We install into \cmd\class@enddocumenthook\ 
-% a trap for the procedure \cmd\clearpage\ that attempts to end the current page.
-% This procedure needs to be headpatched with \cmd\close@column\ to end the current page grid. 
-%
-% This procedure is executed after all typesetting is complete
-% i.e., after items like \cmd\printtables, as well as all commands queued up by \cmd\AtEndDocument. 
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\setup@hook{%
- \let\clearpage@ltx\clearpage
- \prepdef\clear@document{\let\clearpage\clearpage@ltx\let\clear@document\@empty\close@column}%
- \appdef\class@documenthook{%
-  \appdef\class@enddocumenthook{%
-   \let\clearpage\clear@document
-  }%
- }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\authoryear@sw}
-% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
-% The boolean \cmd\authoryear@sw\ signifies that we are to use author-year citations rather than numerical citations.
-% 
-% The \classoption{author-year} class option selects ``'author-year'' citations;  
-% \classoption{numerical} selectes ``numerical'' citations.
-% The former is the default.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{author-year}{\@booleantrue\authoryear@sw}%
-\DeclareOption{numerical}{\@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw}%
-\@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\galley@sw}
-% The boolean \cmd\galley@sw\ signifies that 
-% the document is to be formatted in galley style.
-%
-% Asserting both \cmd\galley@sw\ and \cmd\preprintsty@sw\ 
-% may produce strange formatting results, but it is not illegal.
-% However, it \emph{is} illegal to assert galley and any 
-% twocolumn option.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \classoption{galley} emulates setting the galleys of
-% a two-column journal.
-% CHANGED: this option should effectively set \cmd\preprintsty@sw\ false.
-% NOTE: it makes no sense to assert both galley and twocolumn.
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Class option galley sets \cs{preprintsty@sw} to false}
-% 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{galley}{%
-  \ExecuteOptions{onecolumn}%
-  \@booleantrue\galley@sw
-  \@booleanfalse\preprintsty@sw
-  \appdef\setup@hook{%
-    \advance\textwidth-\columnsep
-    \textwidth.5\textwidth
-  }%
-}%
-\@booleanfalse\galley@sw
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{raggedbottom or flushbottom}%
-% \begin{macro}{\raggedcolumn@sw}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
-% The class options \classoption{raggedbottom} and \classoption{flushbottom} determine whether the columns (page)
-% are ragged bottom or flush bottom.
-% Note that we do not select a default here; that is done by the journal substyle.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{raggedbottom}{\@booleantrue\raggedcolumn@sw}
-\DeclareOption{flushbottom}{\@booleanfalse\raggedcolumn@sw}
-\@booleanfalse\raggedcolumn@sw
-\appdef\setup@hook{%
- \raggedcolumn@sw{\raggedbottom}{\flushbottom}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{tightenlines}%
-%
-% This class option specifies that standard leading 
-% is to be used to set the type.
-% If lacking, the leading will be loose.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\tightenlines@sw}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
-% The boolean \cmd\tightenlines@sw\ signifies that 
-% the leading is to be made standard amount.
-% If false, it means that the leading is to be set extra open.
-% Has no effect on 10pt size option.
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{tightenlines}{\@booleantrue\tightenlines@sw}
-\@booleanfalse\tightenlines@sw
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{lengthcheck}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\lengthcheck@sw}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
-% The flag \cmd\lengthcheck@sw\ signifies that 
-% the length checking is in effect.
-% It is up to the individual journal substyle 
-% to alter its formatting accordingly.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@booleanfalse\lengthcheck@sw
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% This class option specifies that the formatted document 
-% should approach as closely as possible the
-% formatting of an actual journal article 
-% to facilitate the author's performance of a length check.
-%
-%FIXME: society or journal may have its own definition of this option.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{lengthcheck}{%
- \@booleantrue\lengthcheck@sw
- \ExecuteOptions{reprint}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% In addition, if length checking is in effect, we will enable 
-% the tally of text length. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\setup@hook{%
- \lengthcheck@sw{\@booleantrue\tally@box@size@sw}{}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Draft and Final}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\draft@sw}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
-% The flag \cmd\draft@sw\ signifies that the document is to be 
-% formatted in draft mode. 
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\setup@hook{%
- \draft@sw{\overfullrule 5\p@}{\overfullrule\z@}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Certain packages may pay attention to the 
-% class option \classoption{draft} that sets this Boolean.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{draft}{\@booleantrue\draft@sw}%
-\DeclareOption{final}{\@booleanfalse\draft@sw}%
-\@booleanfalse\draft@sw
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{eqsecnum}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\eqsecnum@sw}
-% The flag \cmd\eqsecnum@sw\ signifies that equations are to be 
-% numbered with the section, e.g., ``Eq. (2.13)''.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\setup@hook{%
- \eqsecnum@sw{%
-  \@addtoreset{equation}{section}%
-  \def\theequation@prefix{\arabic{section}.}%
- }{}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The \classoption{eqsecnum} class option signifies that equations are
-% to be numbered within sections.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{eqsecnum}{\@booleantrue\eqsecnum@sw}%
-\@booleanfalse\eqsecnum@sw
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{secnumarabic}%
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer use \cs{secnumarabic@sw}, instead use \cs{setup@secnums}}
-% The \classoption{secnumarabic} class option signifies that sectioning commands are
-% to be numbered arabic: 
-% the procedure \cmd\secnums@arabic\ is executed as the default. 
-% Otherwise, the procedure \cmd\secnums@rtx\ determines things. 
-% The society or journal may redefine either procedure,
-% and may change the definition of \cmd\setup@secnums\ itself, 
-% thereby establishing a different default. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\setup@hook{%
- \setup@secnums
-}%
-\DeclareOption{secnumarabic}{%
- \def\setup@secnums{\secnums@arabic}%
-}%
-\def\setup@secnums{\secnums@rtx}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The code that defines \cmd\secnums@rtx\ and \cmd\secnums@arabic\ appears
-% in Section~\ref{sec:secnumarabic}.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{fleqn}
-% FIXME: model fleqn after amsfonts. I no longer understand why I said this.
-% \file{fleqn.clo} is not a package, so it can simply be \cmd\input. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{fleqn}{%
- \input{fleqn.clo}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{floats/endfloats}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\floats@sw}
-% \begin{macro}{\floatp@sw}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
-% The Boolean \cmd\floats@sw\ signifies that floats are to be floated;
-% if false, that floats are to be deferred to the end of the document.
-% By default, the former.
-% Note that the state of this Boolean is to be changed by 
-% the document class in response to user-selected options.
-% 
-% This boolean and the assignment of its default value is done by
-% the \classname{ltxutil} package.
-%
-% The Boolean \cmd\floatp@sw\ signifies that endfloats are to be set one per page;
-% if false, that endfloats are to be set with multiple floats per page permitted.
-% By default, the latter.
-% Note that the state of this Boolean is to be changed by 
-% the document class in response to user-selected options.
-% The default is established here.
-%
-% These options control, via the Boolean \cmd\floats@sw, 
-% whether floats are to be migrated to the end of the document.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{floats}{\@booleantrue\floats@sw\@booleanfalse\floatp@sw}
-\DeclareOption{endfloats}{\@booleanfalse\floats@sw\@booleanfalse\floatp@sw}
-\DeclareOption{endfloats*}{\@booleanfalse\floats@sw\@booleantrue\floatp@sw}
-\@booleantrue\floats@sw
-\@booleantrue\floatp@sw
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{titlepage/notitlepage}%
-% These options control, via \cmd\titlepage@sw, 
-% whether the title block is to be set on a separate page.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\titlepage@sw}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
-% The flag \cmd\titlepage@sw\ signifies that a forced 
-% page break is to follow the title page: the article
-% title appears on a page by itself.
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{titlepage}{\@booleantrue\titlepage@sw}
-\DeclareOption{notitlepage}{\@booleanfalse\titlepage@sw}
-\@booleanfalse\titlepage@sw
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Substyle and Sub-substyle}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\change@society}
-% \begin{macro}{\change@journal}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) Provide more diagnostics when \cs{@society} is assigned.}
-% If the society or, resp., journal has already been assigned,
-% notify user whether it is being overridden. 
-% 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\change@society#1{%
- \def\@tempa{#1}%
- \@ifxundefined\@society{%
-  \class@info{Selecting society \@tempa}%
-  \let\@society\@tempa
- }{%
-  \@ifx{\@tempa\@society}{}{%
-   \class@warn{Conflicting society \@tempa<>\@society; not selected}%
-  }%
- }%
-}%
-\def\change@journal#1{%
- \def\@tempa{#1}%
- \@ifxundefined\@journal{%
-  \class@info{Selecting journal \@tempa}%
-  \let\@journal\@tempa
- }{%
-  \@ifx{\@tempa\@journal}{}{%
-   \class@warn{Conflicting journal \@tempa<>\@journal; not selected}%
-  }%
- }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Here had been the class options relating to the APS.
-% Now that all societies are on an equal footing, this code is in the
-% respective \file{.rtx} file.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Optical Society of America}%
-% Here are the class options relating to the Optical Society of America.
-%
-% Note: as of 2008, the only OSA module being distributed by ctan is \file{osajnl.rtx}.
-% The class options declared here are, I think, unused.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{osa}{\change@society{osa}\let\@journal\@undefined}%
-\DeclareOption{osameet}{\change@society{osa}\def\@journal{osameet}}%
-\DeclareOption{opex}{\change@society{osa}\def\@journal{opex}}%
-\DeclareOption{tops}{\change@society{osa}\def\@journal{tops}}%
-\DeclareOption{josa}{\change@society{osa}\def\@journal{josa}}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\rtx@require@packages}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
-% The procedure \cmd\rtx@require@packages\ accumulates all \cmd\RequirePackage\ statements
-% in the course of loading the document class. 
-% Carrying out these operations at that time is needed:
-% \cmd\ProcessOptions\ must be executed first. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\let\rtx@require@packages\@empty
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\MakeUppercase}
-% \begin{macro}{\MakeLowercase}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Package textcase is now simply a required package}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
-% \changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 538) \cs{MakeTextUppercase} inappropriately expands the double backslash}
-% We load the \classname{textcase} package of David Carlisle.
-% Now that its bug of long standing has been repaired, we no longer need to doctor it up. 
-% And, because its loading has been deferred until \cmd\rtx@require@packages\ time, 
-% we no longer override \LaTeX\ here. Instead, the \classname{textcase} package
-% will be asked to do that. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
- \RequirePackage[overload]{textcase}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The following code used to
-% let the \classname{textcase} commands override those of \LaTeX:
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-%\appdef\setup@hook{%
-% \expandafter
-% \let\csname MakeUppercase \expandafter\endcsname
-%    \csname MakeTextUppercase \endcsname
-% \expandafter
-% \let\csname MakeLowercase \expandafter\endcsname
-%    \csname MakeTextLowercase \endcsname
-% }%
-%    \end{verbatim}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{amsfonts}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
-% The class option \classoption{amsfonts} has the
-% same effect as if the document preamble contained
-% a \cmd\usepackage\verb${amsfonts}$ statement.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{amsfonts}{%
-  \def\class@amsfonts{\RequirePackage{amsfonts}}%
-}%
-\DeclareOption{noamsfonts}{%
-  \let\class@amsfonts\@empty
-}%
-\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
- \@ifxundefined\class@amsfonts{}{\class@amsfonts}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{amssymb}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
-% The class option \classoption{amssymb} has the
-% same effect as if the document preamble contained
-% a \cmd\usepackage\verb${amssymb}$ statement.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{amssymb}{%
-  \def\class@amssymb{\RequirePackage{amssymb}}%
-}%
-\DeclareOption{noamssymb}{%
-  \let\class@amssymb\@empty
-}%
-\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
- \@ifxundefined\class@amssymb{}{\class@amssymb}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{amsmath}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
-% The class option \classoption{amsmath} has the
-% same effect as if the document preamble contained
-% a \cmd\usepackage\verb${amsmath}$ statement.
-%
-% We require version 1.2 (datestamped 1997/03/20) or later.
-% The \expandafter\cmd\csname ver@amsmath.sty\endcsname, will 
-% 
-% \LaTeX\ note:
-% Certain \LaTeX\ procedures have an arbitrary and pointless restriction that they may be used only within the preamble.
-% We get around this by preserving the procedures in private \cmd\csname s.
-%
-% FIXME note: it is difficult to ensure that an error summary will be printed on the console at the very end,
-% but \classname{ltxgrid} allows accomplishing this via an interrupt, put down at \cmd\AtEndDocument\ time.
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{amsmath}{%
-  \def\class@amsmath{\RequirePackage{amsmath}[\ver@amsmath@prefer]}%
-}%
-\DeclareOption{noamsmath}{%
-  \let\class@amsmath\@empty
-}%
-\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
- \preserve@LaTeX
- \@ifxundefined\class@amsmath{}{\class@amsmath}%
- \appdef\class@enddocumenthook{\test@amsmath@ver}%
-}%
-\appdef\preserve@LaTeX{%
- \let\@ifl@aded@LaTeX\@ifl@aded
- \let\@ifpackageloaded@LaTeX\@ifpackageloaded
- \let\@pkgextension@LaTeX\@pkgextension
- \let\@ifpackagelater@LaTeX\@ifpackagelater
- \let\@ifl@ter@LaTeX\@ifl@ter
- \let\@ifl@t@r@LaTeX\@ifl@t@r
- \let\@parse@version@LaTeX\@parse@version
-}%
-\appdef\restore@LaTeX{%
- \let\@ifl@aded\@ifl@aded@LaTeX
- \let\@ifpackageloaded\@ifpackageloaded@LaTeX
- \let\@pkgextension\@pkgextension@LaTeX
- \let\@ifpackagelater\@ifpackagelater@LaTeX
- \let\@ifl@ter\@ifl@ter@LaTeX
- \let\@ifl@t@r\@ifl@t@r@LaTeX
- \let\@parse@version\@parse@version@LaTeX
-}%
-\def\test@amsmath@ver{%
- \begingroup
-  \restore@LaTeX
-  \@ifpackageloaded{amsmath}{%
-   \@ifpackagelater{amsmath}{\ver@amsmath@prefer}{}{%
-     \class@warn{%
-      You have loaded amsmath, version "\csname ver@amsmath.sty\endcsname",\MessageBreak
-      but this class requires version "\ver@amsmath@prefer", or later.\MessageBreak
-      Please update your LaTeX installation.
-     }%
-   }%
-  }{%
-  }%
- \endgroup
-}%
-\def\ver@amsmath@prefer{2000/01/15 v2.05 AMS math features}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Presenting Authors and Their Affiliations}%
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Code relating to new syntax for frontmatter has been placed in \file{ltxfront.dtx}}
-% Class options for presenting authors and their affiliations are now defined in 
-% \file{ltxfront.dtx}.
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Typeset by \revtex}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\byrevtex@sw}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
-% The flag \cmd\byrevtex@sw\ signifies that the document should
-% bear an imprint to the effect that it was formatted by this document class.
-%
-% The class option \classoption{byrevtex} signifies that you want the 
-% ``Typeset by \revtex'' byline to appear on your formatted output.
-% By default, no such byline appears.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{byrevtex}{\@booleantrue\byrevtex@sw}%
-\@booleanfalse\byrevtex@sw
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Attempt to fix float placement failure}%
-% 
-% \begin{macro}{\force@deferlist@sw}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
-% \revtex\ uses the \classname{ltxgrid} package, which provides the ability to attempt repairs when 
-% \LaTeX's float placement mechanism is about to fail, but that facility is turned off by default.
-% Users should invoke the \classoption{floatfix} document class option to enable this \LaTeX\ extension.
-% If not, a helpful message is printed in the log, indicating how to work around the difficulty.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{floatfix}{\@booleantrue\force@deferlist@sw}%
-\DeclareOption{nofloatfix}{\@booleanfalse\force@deferlist@sw}%
-\@booleanfalse\force@deferlist@sw
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@fltovf}
-% \begin{macro}{\@fltstk}
-%  The \LaTeX\ kernel error message \cmd\@fltovf\ may now be a bit more helpful to the user;
-%  likewise for the \cmd\@fltstk\ message of \classname{ltxgrid}.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\gdef\@fltovf{%
- \@latex@error{%
-  Too many unprocessed floats%
-  \force@deferlist@sw{}{; try class option [floatfix]}%
- }\@ehb
-}%
-\def\@fltstk{%
- \@latex@warning{%
-  A float is stuck (cannot be placed)%
-  \force@deferlist@sw{}{; try class option [floatfix]}%
- }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ltxgrid@info@sw}
-% \begin{macro}{\outputdebug@sw}
-% The two options \classoption{ltxgridinfo} and \classoption{outputdebug} turn on informative diagnostics within the 
-% package \classname{ltxgrid}. Only people who really want to see this output will select these class options.
-% Consult documentation for the \classname{ltxgrid} package to see what output the related switches enable.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{ltxgridinfo}{%
- \@booleantrue\ltxgrid@info@sw
-%\@booleantrue\ltxgrid@foot@info@sw
-}%
-\DeclareOption{outputdebug}{%
- \@booleantrue\outputdebug@sw
- \@booleantrue\ltxgrid@info@sw
- \@booleantrue\ltxgrid@foot@info@sw
- \traceoutput
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Option to relax page height}%
-% 
-% \begin{macro}{\textheight@sw}
-% The \classname{ltxgrid} package can set text pages to their natural height or force them to the full 
-% text height; the latter is the default.
-% If setting the pages with a variable length,
-% the running foot will move up or down with the natural length of the text column.
-% While I recommend against doing so, this option will turn that switch to the latter setting.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{raggedfooter}{\@booleanfalse\textheight@sw}%
-\DeclareOption{noraggedfooter}{\@booleantrue\textheight@sw}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Selecting procedure for processing abstract}%
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Remove options newabstract and oldabstract}
-% Code defining options \classoption{newabstract} and \classoption{oldabstract} has been removed.
-%
-% \subsection{Option to turn on diagnostics in the frontmatter}%
-% 
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatterverbose@sw}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Code relating to new syntax for frontmatter has been placed in \file{ltxfront.dtx}}
-% A diagnostic option, not for the average enduser, which reveals 
-% the workings of the frontmatter.
-% This code interfaces to that of \file{ltxfront.dtx}.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{frontmatterverbose}{\@booleantrue\frontmatterverbose@sw}%
-\@booleanfalse\frontmatterverbose@sw
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% 
-% \begin{macro}{\linenumbers@sw}
-% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 513) Add class option linenumbers: number the lines a la \classname{lineno}}
-% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/13}{(AO, 573) arrange to load \classname{lineno} after any other packages.}%
-% An option to number the lines of type in the output in the manner of \classname{lineno}.
-%
-% At present, we use that very package to implement this functionality.
-% This means that users may modify the workings of that package per its documentation (which see).
-%
-% However, compatibility with \classname{amsmath} requires that \classname{lineno} be loaded afterwards.
-% Therefore, we defer loading of this package until after the preamble is completed. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{linenumbers}{%
- \appdef
- \class@documenthook{%
-  \RequirePackage{lineno}[2005/11/02 v4.41]%
-  \linenumbersep4pt\relax
-  \linenumbers\relax
- }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% By default, line numbering is off. 
-% \end{macro}
-% 
-% \begin{macro}{\NAT@merge}
-% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/15}{(AO, 523) Add class option nomerge, to turn off new natbib 8.3 syntax}
-% Add class option nomerge, to turn off natbib 8.3 syntax for citation key. 
-% The default value of REVTeX 4.1 for \cmd\NAT@merge is \cmd\thr@@, which turns on  
-% the new syntax along with its semantics. 
-% Legacy documents that would be incompatible with the new syntax can be successfully processed 
-% with class option \classoption{nomerge}.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{nomerge}{%
- \appdef\setup@hook{%
-  \@ifnum{\NAT@merge>\z@}{\let\NAT@merge\z@}{}%
- }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Default Option, Society, Journal, and pointsize}%
-%
-% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 488) Change processing of options to allow an unused option to specify society and journal}%
-% This change will not break OSA documents because that society is still built in to revtex4.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@parse@class@options@society}
-% \begin{macro}{\@parse@class@options@}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Procedures \cs{@parse@class@options@society} and \cs{@parse@class@options@journal} and friends}
-% The procedure \cmd\@parse@class@options@society\ parses the options passed to this document class 
-% for the \cmd\@society. 
-% It is like \cmd\ProcessOptions*\ in that it accesses
-% \cmd\@ptionlist\{\cmd\@currname.\cmd\@currext\}.
-% Any undefined option is considered: if there is a corresponding \file{.rtx} file,
-% it will change the society accordingly
-% and define a placeholder class option for the society thus found
-% (thus preventing a spurious "option not found" message). 
-% 
-% The procedure \cmd\@parse@class@options@\ parses the document's options
-% for any that set the \cmd\csname\ provided. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@parse@class@options@society{%
- \edef\@tempa{\@ptionlist{\@currname.\@currext}}%
- \expandafter\@for\expandafter\CurrentOption\expandafter:\expandafter=\@tempa\do{%
-  \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname{}{%
-   \IfFileExists{\CurrentOption\substyle@post.\substyle@ext}{%
-    \expandafter\change@society\expandafter{\CurrentOption}%
-    \expandafter\let\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname\@empty
-   }{}%
-  }%
- }%
-}%
-\def\@parse@class@options@#1{%
- \edef\@tempa{\@ptionlist{\@currname.\@currext}}%
- \expandafter\@for\expandafter\CurrentOption\expandafter:\expandafter=\@tempa\do{%
-  \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
-   \begingroup\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname
-    \@ifxundefined#1{%
-     \endgroup
-    }{%
-     \expandafter\endgroup\expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1}%
-    }%
-  }{}%
- }%
-}%
-\def\@parse@class@options@journal{%
- \edef\@tempa{\@ptionlist{\@currname.\@currext}}%
- \expandafter\@for\expandafter\CurrentOption\expandafter:\expandafter=\@tempa\do{%
-  \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
-   \begingroup
-    \csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname
-    \@ifxundefined\@journal{%
-     \endgroup
-    }{%
-     \expandafter\endgroup\expandafter\def\expandafter\@journal\expandafter{\@journal}%
-    }%
-  }{}%
- }%
-}%
-\def\@parse@class@options{%
- \edef\@tempa{\@ptionlist{\@currname.\@currext}}%
- \expandafter\@for\expandafter\CurrentOption\expandafter:\expandafter=\@tempa\do{%
-  \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
-   \begingroup
-    \csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname
-    \@ifxundefined\@pointsize{%
-     \endgroup
-    }{%
-     \expandafter\endgroup\expandafter\def\expandafter\@pointsize\expandafter{\@pointsize}%
-    }%
-  }{%
-   \IfFileExists{\CurrentOption\substyle@post.\substyle@ext}{%
-    \expandafter\change@society\expandafter{\CurrentOption}%
-    \expandafter\let\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname\@empty
-   }{}%
-  }%
- }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 545) hypertext capabilities off by default; enable with \classoption{hypertext}}
-% The class option \classoption{hypertext} enables the built-in hypertext capabilities,
-% which coincide with those of \classname{custom-bib}-generated BIBTeX styles
-% using the guard code \texttt{hypertext}. 
-%
-% Note that APS has these capabilities turned off by default;
-% Loading the hyperref package turns them on.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{hypertext}{\hypertext@enable@ltx}%
-\appdef\document@inithook{\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{\hypertext@enable@ltx}{}}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The default handling for a document class option depends upon whether the \cmd\@society\ is 
-% defined. 
-%
-% If not, then hunt for a \file{.rtx} file with that name.
-% If it exists, then we will take this option as the name of the society, 
-% otherwise, declare the option as not used.
-% 
-% (This behavior is similar to the \LaTeX2.09 handling, where
-% one looked for a \file{.sty} file, except that 
-% in this case, we must provide for journal substyles that may be 
-% defined in the society file, or have their own journal substyle file.)
-%
-% At the point where the class file is finished loading, 
-% we then read in the society file. 
-% That file can define further class options, such as the journal substyle.
-%
-% For users, this will mean that they can specify the society and journal simply 
-% by specifying first the former and then the latter among their document class options.
-% The society \emph{must} have a corresponding \file{.rtx}.
-%
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/05/29}{The csname substyle@ext is now defined without a dot (.), to be compatible with \LaTeX usage (see @clsextension and @pkgextension).}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%</options>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%<*package>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@process@society}
-% \begin{macro}{\@process@journal}
-% \begin{macro}{\@process@pointsize}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\substyle@post{4-2}%
-\def\substyle@ext{rtx}%
-\DeclareOption*{\OptionNotUsed}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% A society substyle may define its own options, via \cmd\DeclareOption. 
-%
-% At the end of this document class, we process the society file,
-% using \file{aps.rtx} if none has been specified in the document.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@process@society#1{%
- \@ifxundefined\@society{%
-  \class@warn{No Society specified, using default society #1}%
-  \def\@society{#1}\let\@journal\@undefined
- }{}%
- \expandafter\input\expandafter{\@society\substyle@post.\substyle@ext}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% A society substyle can encompass any number of journal substyles;
-% we use the following procedure to invoke the proper one.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@process@journal#1{%
- \@ifxundefined\@journal{%
-  \class@warn{No journal specified, using default #1}%
-  \def\@journal{#1}%
- }{}%
- \expandafter\expandafter
- \expandafter\rtx@do@substyle
- \expandafter\expandafter
- \expandafter{\expandafter\@society\@journal}%
-}%
-\def\rtx@do@substyle#1{%
- \InputIfFileExists{#1\substyle@post.\substyle@ext}{}{\csname rtx@#1\endcsname}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% 
-% Document class options \classoption{10pt}, \classoption{11pt}, and \classoption{12pt} 
-% are implemented by \revtex\ itself and determine \cmd\@pointsize. 
-% These provide formatting settings appropriate to the society's journals. 
-%
-% If not specified by the document, a value \cmd\@pointsize@default\ is used. 
-% This default can be set by the journal. Here, the society sets its default. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@process@pointsize#1{%
- \@ifxundefined\@pointsize{%
-  \def\@pointsize{#1}%
-  \class@warn{No type size specified, using default \@pointsize}%
- }{}%
- \expandafter\expandafter
- \expandafter\rtx@do@substyle
- \expandafter\expandafter
- \expandafter{\expandafter\@society\@pointsize pt}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Class-Asserted Options}%
-% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Removed invocation of nonexistent class option \protect\classoption{groupauthors} and all other class options that should only be invoked by the document. (Otherwise precedence of class options does not work.)}
-% Here we establish the default document class options.
-% Those of the document itself will override these.
-%
-% \section{Procedures Dependent Upon Options}
-%
-% Here we introduce \classname{classes.dtx} definitions for 
-% the page styles that people will expect to be able to use.
-% \begin{macro}{\ps@headings}
-% \begin{macro}{\ps@myheadings}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \def\ps@headings{%
-      \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
-      \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil\slshape\leftmark}%
-      \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
-      \let\@mkboth\markboth
-    \def\sectionmark##1{%
-      \markboth {\MakeUppercase{%
-        \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@
-          \thesection\quad
-        \fi
-        ##1}}{}}%
-    \def\subsectionmark##1{%
-      \markright {%
-        \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\@ne
-          \thesubsection\quad
-        \fi
-        ##1}}}%
-\def\ps@myheadings{%
-    \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
-    \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil\slshape\leftmark}%
-    \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
-    \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
-    \let\sectionmark\@gobble
-    \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
-    }%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ps@article}
-% \begin{macro}{\ps@article@final}
-% \begin{macro}{\ps@preprint}
-% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so the following test works}
-% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer decision until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
-% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Insert procedure \cs{checkindate}}
-% \changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/17}{Running headers always as if two-sided}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ps@article{%
-    \def\@evenhead{\let\\\heading@cr\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil{\leftmark}}%
-    \def\@oddhead{\let\\\heading@cr{\rightmark}\hfil\checkindate\quad\thepage}%
-    \def\@oddfoot{}%
-    \def\@evenfoot{}%
-    \let\@mkboth\markboth
-  \let\sectionmark\@gobble
-  \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
-}%
-\def\ps@article@final{%
-    \def\@evenhead{\let\\\heading@cr\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil{\leftmark}}%
-    \def\@oddhead{\let\\\heading@cr{\rightmark}\hfil\checkindate\quad\thepage}%
-    \def\@oddfoot{}%
-    \def\@evenfoot{}%
-    \let\@mkboth\markboth
-    \def\sectionmark##1{%
-      \markboth{%
-       \MakeTextUppercase{%
-        \@ifnum{\c@secnumdepth >\z@}{\thesection\hskip 1em\relax}{}%
-         ##1%
-       }%
-       }{}%
-    }%
-    \def\subsectionmark##1{%
-      \markright {%
-        \@ifnum{\c@secnumdepth >\@ne}{\thesubsection\hskip 1em\relax}{}%
-         ##1%
-      }%
-    }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\heading@cr{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Do not put by REVTeX in every page foot}
-% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Insert procedure \cs{checkindate}}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ps@preprint{%
-  \def\@oddfoot{\hfil\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil}%
-  \def\@evenfoot{\hfil\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil}%
-  \def\@oddhead{}%
-  \def\@evenhead{}%
-  \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
-  \let\sectionmark\@gobble
-  \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\let\@oddhead\@empty
-\let\@evenhead\@empty
-\let\@oddfoot\@empty
-\let\@evenfoot\@empty
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\lastpage@putlabel}
-% Support the default meaning of \cmd\@endpage.
-% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so \cs{clearpage} not in scope of twocolumn}
-% \changes{4.1k}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 554) give the \cs{newlabel} command syntax appropriate to the hyperref package}
-% Name of this macro (and the \cmd\label\ key) taken from 
-% \url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/other/lastpage}%
-% with code optimised slightly.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\lastpage@putlabel{%
- \if@filesw
-  \begingroup
-    \advance\c@page\m@ne
-    \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\newlabel{LastPage}{{}{\thepage}{}{}{}}}%
-  \endgroup
- \fi
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Install a procedure into document endgame processing that 
-% labels the last page of the document.
-% This is done just before the \file{.aux} file
-% is closed, and does not require a \cmd\shipout, because it writes
-% directly to the \file{.aux} file.
-% Note that we assume no further \cmd\shipout s will be done past this point.
-% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/09}{(AO, 569) execute the after-last-shipout procedures from within the safety of the output routine}%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\clear@document{%
- \do@output@cclv{%
-  \lastpage@putlabel
-  \tally@box@size@sw{\total@text}{}%
- }%
-}%
-\providecommand\write@column@totals{}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \section{Required Packages}
-% \url{CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/other/misc/url.sty}%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
- \RequirePackage{url}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \section{Incompatible Packages}
-%
-% We wait until after the preamble is processed, then check for any packages 
-% that might have been loaded which we know to be incompatible with \revtex.
-%
-% The \classname{multicol} package is incompatible with \classname{ltxgrid}, which replaces it.
-% The \classname{cite} package is incompatible with \classname{natbib}, which replaces its functionality.
-% The functionality of the \classname{mcite} package is provided by \classname{natbib}. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\document@inithook{%
- \incompatible@package{cite}%
- \incompatible@package{mcite}%
- \incompatible@package{multicol}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \section{Society- and Journal-Specific Code}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@journal}
-% Journal test helper, used as
-% \begin{verbatim}
-%\@ifx{\@journal\journal@pra}{%
-%  <journal-specific setup>
-%\fi
-% \end{verbatim}
-% Journal code might like to further specify (if as yet undefined) or distinguish on
-% the following Booleans.
-%
-% Note: the journal substyle code should only alter the value of one of these Booleans if
-% the Boolean is \cmd\undefined. This convention is what makes the document's
-% options take precedence over the values set by the journal.
-% 
-% FIXME: make this table an exhaustive listing of all the parameters set by
-% the class options.
-%
-% \begin{tabular}{ll}
-% \cmd\@pointsize      &(10|11|12), depending on the type size\\
-% \cmd\footinbib@sw    &true if footnotes are to be formatted in the bibliography\\
-% \cmd\preprintsty@sw  &true for preprint and hyperpreprint\\
-% \cmd\eqsecnum@sw     &true means that equations are numbered within sections\\
-% \cmd\groupauthors@sw &true means authors listed separately for each address\\
-% \cmd\preprint@sw     &true means to produce the preprint numbers as part of the title block\\
-% \cmd\showPACS@sw     &true means to produce the PACS as part of the title block\\
-% \cmd\showKEYS@sw     &true means to produce the keywords as part of the title block\\
-% \cmd\@affils@sw      &true means each affiliation is printed, for each author\\
-% \cmd\runinaddress@sw &true means author addresses are printed run-in\\
-% \cmd\draft@sw        &true implies that PACS will be printed\\
-% \cmd\tightenlines@sw &true if preprint single spaced\\
-% \cmd\lengthcheck@sw  &true if length checking is in effect\\
-% \cmd\byrevtex@sw     &true means to announce ``typeset by \revtex''\\
-% \cmd\titlepage@sw    &true for title is to be set on a separate page\\
-% \cmd\twocolumn@sw    &true if two-column page grid\\
-% \cmd\twocolumn@sw    &true if we are to automatically balance the columns of the last page\\
-% \cmd\twoside@sw      &true means to format pages for duplex printing\\
-% \cmd\floats@sw       &false means floats are migrated to end of document\\
-% \cmd\floatp@sw       &true means endfloats are set one to a page\\
-% \cmd\class@amsfonts  &if \cmd\@empty, means that \classname{amsfonts} will \emph{not} be loaded\\
-% \cmd\class@amssymb   &if \cmd\@empty, means that \classname{amssymb} will \emph{not} be loaded\\
-% \cmd\frontmatter@footnote &if \cmd\undefined, means that the default (\cmd\footnote) will be used\\
-% \cmd\place@bibnumber &if \cmd\undefined, means that the default (inline) will be used\\
-% \end{tabular}
-%
-% Note: if \cmd\twocolumn@sw\ and \cmd\preprintsty@sw\ are both false,
-% then `galley' style is in effect. The \classoption{galley} option invokes
-% \classoption{onecolumn}, but does not affect the \cmd\preprintsty@sw.
-%
-% Note: \cmd\paperwidth\ and \cmd\paperheight\ are not integrated into this scheme,
-% and should be selected by the document alone.
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \section{Body}
-%
-% \subsection{counters}
-% The following definitions are probably identical to those in 
-% \file{classes.dtx}%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\labelenumi{\theenumi.}
-\def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\labelenumii{(\theenumii)}
-\def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}}
-\def\p@enumii{\theenumi}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii.}
-\def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}}
-\def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv.}
-\def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}}
-\def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\labelitemi{\textbullet}
-\def\labelitemii{\normalfont\bfseries\textendash}
-\def\labelitemiii{\textasteriskcentered}
-\def\labelitemiv{\textperiodcentered}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\pagenumbering{arabic}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{float parameters}
-%
-% from the old aps.sty. (DPC: same as article I think)
-% AO: here, \LaTeX's standard classes fail very poorly
-% (the price of backward compatability): the values for
-% \cmd\floatpagefraction\ and \cmd\dblfloatpagefraction\
-% need to be raised to avoid creating extremely short
-% float pages.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\setcounter{topnumber}{2}
-\def\topfraction{.9}
-\setcounter{bottomnumber}{1}
-\def\bottomfraction{.9}
-\setcounter{totalnumber}{3}
-\def\textfraction{.1}
-\def\floatpagefraction{.9}
-\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{2}
-\def\dbltopfraction{.9}
-\def\dblfloatpagefraction{.9}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{List Environments}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newenvironment{verse}{%
-  \let\\=\@centercr
-  \list{}{%
-    \itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em\listparindent \itemindent
-    \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item[]%
-}{%
- \endlist
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newenvironment{quotation}{%
-  \list{}{%
-    \listparindent 1.5em
-    \itemindent\listparindent
-    \rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep \z@ \@plus\p@}\item[]%
-}{%
- \endlist
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newenvironment{quote}{%
-  \list{}{%
-  \rightmargin\leftmargin}\item[]%
-}{%
- \endlist
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/30}{(AO) Structure the Abstract using the \texttt{bibliography} environment}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\descriptionlabel#1{%
-  \hspace\labelsep \normalfont\bfseries #1\unskip:%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newenvironment{description}{%
- \list{}{%
-    \labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin
-    \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel
- }%
-}{%
- \endlist
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Sectioning Commands\label{sec:secnumarabic}}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Sectioning Commands and Their Productions}%
-% The following counters are defined by LaTeX's standard document classes.
-% We do likewise, then assign flag values to the productions, awaiting
-% overrides.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcounter{part}%
-\let\thepart\@undefined
-\newcounter{section}%
-\let\thesection\@undefined
-\newcounter{subsection}[section]%
-\let\thesubsection\@undefined
-\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection]%
-\let\thesubsubsection\@undefined
-\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection]%
-\let\theparagraph\@undefined
-\newcounter{subparagraph}[paragraph]%
-\let\thesubparagraph\@undefined
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The procedure invoked by \cmd\setup@secnums\ provides meanings for these productions. 
-% 
-% \begin{macro}{\secnums@rtx}
-% \begin{macro}{\secnums@arabic}
-% These two procedures define the meanings of each of the productions
-% of the counters of the sectioning commands,
-% but only if nothing else has defined it.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\secnums@rtx{%
- \@ifxundefined\thepart{%
-  \def\thepart{\Roman{part}}%
- }{}%
- \@ifxundefined\thesection{%
-  \def\thesection       {\Roman{section}}%
-  \def\p@section        {}%
- }{}%
- \@ifxundefined\thesubsection{%
-  \def\thesubsection    {\Alph{subsection}}%
-  \def\p@subsection     {\thesection\,}%
- }{}%
- \@ifxundefined\thesubsubsection{%
-  \def\thesubsubsection {\arabic{subsubsection}}%
-  \def\p@subsubsection  {\thesection\,\thesubsection\,}%
- }{}%
- \@ifxundefined\theparagraph{%
-  \def\theparagraph     {\alph{paragraph}}%
-  \def\p@paragraph      {\thesection\,\thesubsection\,\thesubsubsection\,}%
- }{}%
- \@ifxundefined\thesubparagraph{%
-  \def\thesubparagraph  {\arabic{subparagraph}}%
-  \def\p@subparagraph   {\thesection\,\thesubsection\,\thesubsubsection\,\theparagraph\,}%
- }{}%
-}%
-\def\secnums@arabic{%
- \@ifxundefined\thepart{%
-  \def\thepart          {\Roman{part}}%
- }{}%
- \@ifxundefined\thesection{%
-  \def\thesection       {\Roman{section}}%
-  \def\p@section        {}%
- }{}%
- \@ifxundefined\thesubsection{%
-  \def\thesubsection    {\thesection.\arabic{subsection}}%
-  \def\p@subsection     {}%
- }{}%
- \@ifxundefined\thesubsubsection{%
-  \def\thesubsubsection {\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}}%
-  \def\p@subsubsection  {}%
- }{}%
- \@ifxundefined\theparagraph{%
-  \def\theparagraph     {\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}}%
-  \def\p@paragraph      {}%
- }{}%
- \@ifxundefined\thesubparagraph{%
-  \def\thesubparagraph  {\theparagraph.\arabic{subparagraph}}%
-  \def\p@subparagraph   {}%
- }{}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{The Acknowledgments Environment}%
-% This user-level markup produces a head introducing 
-% the acknowledgments, and acts as a wrapper for the text.
-% In this implementation, it is an unnumbered section,
-% but appears within the toc.
-%
-% For compatiability's sake, we implement it under the alternative
-% spelling \env{acknowledgements}.
-% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{also spelled ``acknowledgements''.}
-% \changes{4.0d}{2000/05/18}{But alternative spelling is deprecated.}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newenvironment{acknowledgments}{%
- \acknowledgments@sw{%
-  \expandafter\section\expandafter*\expandafter{\acknowledgmentsname}%
- }{%
-  \par
-  \phantomsection
-  \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}\acknowledgmentsname}%
- }%
-}{%
- \par
-}%
-\@booleantrue\acknowledgments@sw
-\newenvironment{acknowledgements}{%
- \replace@environment{acknowledgements}{acknowledgments}%
-}{%
- \endacknowledgments
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Part Opener}%
-% section setup copied verbatim from revtex3 aps/osa.
-% Does not explicitly depend on pointsize options.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\part{\par
-   \addvspace{4ex}%
-   \@afterindentfalse
-   \secdef\@part\@spart}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@part[#1]#2{%
- \@ifnum{\c@secnumdepth >\m@ne}{%
-        \refstepcounter{part}%
-        \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}%
- }{%
-      \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
- }%
- \begingroup
-    \parindent \z@ \raggedright
-    \interlinepenalty\@M
-    \@ifnum{\c@secnumdepth >\m@ne}{%
-      \Large \bf \partname~\thepart%
-      \par\nobreak
-    }{}%
-    \huge \bf
-    #2%
-    \markboth{}{}\par
- \endgroup
-   \nobreak
-   \vskip 3ex
-   \@afterheading
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@spart#1{{\parindent \z@ \raggedright
-    \interlinepenalty\@M
-    \huge \bf
-    #1\par}
-    \nobreak
-    \vskip 3ex
-    \@afterheading}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Stacked Heads}%
-% Here are the class default definitions for sectioning commands.
-% A society or a journal substyle will likely override these definitions.
-%
-% In doing so, you can customize the formatting for a particular level by defining,
-% e.g., \cmd\@hangfrom@section\ or \cmd\@subsectioncntformat.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\section{%
-  \@startsection
-    {section}%
-    {1}%
-    {\z@}%
-    {0.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
-    {0.5cm}%
-    {\normalfont\small\bfseries}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\subsection{%
-  \@startsection
-    {subsection}%
-    {2}%
-    {\z@}%
-    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
-    {.5cm}%
-    {\normalfont\small\bfseries}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\subsubsection{%
-  \@startsection
-    {subsubsection}%
-    {3}%
-    {\z@}%
-    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
-    {.5cm}%
-    {\normalfont\small\itshape}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Runin Heads}%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\paragraph{%
-  \@startsection
-    {paragraph}%
-    {4}%
-    {\parindent}%
-    {\z@}%
-    {-1em}%
-    {\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\subparagraph{%
-  \@startsection
-    {subparagraph}%
-    {5}%
-    {\parindent}%
-    {3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
-    {-1em}%
-    {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Math}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\theequation}
-% We change the production of the equation counter so that 
-% we can accomodate the \classoption{eqsecnum} option.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\theequation{%
- \theequation@prefix\arabic{equation}%
-}%
-\def\theequation@prefix{}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Type Size-Dependent Settings}
-%
-% \subsection{All Point Sizes}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\lineskip 1pt
-\normallineskip 1pt
-\def\baselinestretch{1}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@lowpenalty   51
-\@medpenalty  151
-\@highpenalty 301
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@beginparpenalty -\@lowpenalty
-\@endparpenalty   -\@lowpenalty
-\@itempenalty     -\@lowpenalty
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\arraycolsep 3pt
-\tabcolsep 2pt
-\arrayrulewidth .4pt
-\doublerulesep 2pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\skip\@mpfootins = 0pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\fboxsep  = 3.0pt
-\fboxrule = 0.4pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Figures}
-% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Processing delayed to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
-%
-% \begin{environment}{figure}
-% We define the \env{figure} environment.
-% Later, we will horse around with its meaning
-% in order to accomodate \cmd\floats@sw.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newenvironment{figure}
-               {\@float{figure}}
-               {\end@float}
-\newenvironment{figure*}
-               {\@dblfloat{figure}}
-               {\end@dblfloat}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\listoffigures{\print@toc{lof}}%
-\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption}
-% If caption is one line long, to be centered; if lines turn, then set justified.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newlength\abovecaptionskip
-\newlength\belowcaptionskip
-\setlength\abovecaptionskip{10\p@}
-\setlength\belowcaptionskip{2\p@}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{One-line caption sets flush left.}
-% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Prevent an inner footnote from performing twice}
-% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 460) ``Proper style is "FIG. 1. ..." (no colon)''}%
-% There is a hook \cmd\@caption@fignum@sep\ for determining 
-% the separator following the float number, e.g., ``Fig.1''.
-% Formerly, we had defined it to be ``: '', now the colon has been replace by a period (full stop). 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
-  \par
-% \nobreak
-  \vskip\abovecaptionskip
-  \begingroup
-   \small\rmfamily
-   \sbox\@tempboxa{%
-    \let\\\heading@cr
-    \@make@capt@title{#1}{#2}%
-   }%
-   \@ifdim{\wd\@tempboxa >\hsize}{%
-    \begingroup
-     \samepage
-     \flushing
-     \let\footnote\@footnotemark@gobble
-     \@make@capt@title{#1}{#2}\par
-    \endgroup
-   }{%
-     \global \@minipagefalse
-     \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\unhbox\@tempboxa\hfil}%
-   }%
-  \endgroup
-  \vskip\belowcaptionskip
-}%
-\def\@make@capt@title#1#2{%
- \@ifx@empty\float@link{\@firstofone}{\expandafter\href\expandafter{\float@link}}%
-  {#1}\@caption@fignum@sep#2%
-}%
-\def\@footnotemark@gobble{%
- \@footnotemark
- \@ifnextchar[{\@gobble@opt@i}{\@gobble}%
-}%
-\def\@gobble@opt@i[#1]#2{}%
-\def\@mpmakefntext#1{%
- \flushing
- \parindent=1em
- \noindent
- \hb@xt@1em{\hss\@makefnmark}%
- #1%
-}%
-\def\@caption@fignum@sep{. }%
-\def\setfloatlink{\def\float@link}%
-\let\float@link\@empty
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\thefigure}
-% The figure counter and float placement defaults.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcounter{figure}
-\renewcommand \thefigure {\@arabic\c@figure}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Note that we give the `!' modifier by default.
-% This is an effort to avoid the syndrome wherein
-% a deferred float finds itself unqualified for 
-% placement, thereby getting carried until \cmd\clearpage.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\fps@figure{tbp}
-\def\ftype@figure{1}
-\def\ext@figure{lof}
-\def\fnum@figure{\figurename~\thefigure}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% We allocate a box register for use in tallying the column inches of floats of this type.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\newbox\csname fbox@\ftype@figure\endcsname
-\expandafter\setbox\csname fbox@\ftype@figure\endcsname\hbox{}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Deferring \env{figure} Floats}%
-%
-% We determine if figures are to float or be deferred until \cmd\printfigures\ time. 
-% If so, we open the stream that will receive the deferred document portions. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\class@documenthook{%
- \do@if@floats{figure}{.fgx}%
-}%
-\appdef\class@enddocumenthook{%
- \printfigures\relax
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% 
-% \begin{macro}{\printfigures}
-% The user-level command \cmd\printfigures\ determines
-% where the figures are to appear in a document in which
-% \cmd\floats@sw\ is false.
-% If the user invokes the \classoption{endfloats} class option and fails to
-% insert a \cmd\printfigures\ command, 
-% the figures will be printed at the end of the document.
-% If the command is given, but floats are not being deferred, 
-% it amounts to a no-op.
-% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{call \cs{print@floats}}
-% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{*-form mandates pagebreak}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\printfigures{%
- \@ifstar{\true@sw}{\floatp@sw{\true@sw}{\false@sw}}%
- {%
-  \print@float{figure}{\oneapage}%
- }{%
-  \print@float{figure}{}%
- }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@xfloat@prep}
-% We patch into the procedure \cmd\@xfloat@prep. 
-% This patch applies to all floats (not \env{figure} alone)
-% and makes the type center.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\@xfloat@prep{%
- \appdef\@parboxrestore{\centering}%
-%\let\@makefnmark\@makefnmark@latex
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Tables}
-% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Processing delayed to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
-%
-% DPC: More or less taken from \file{revtex2} \file{aps.sty},
-% but using dcolumn for decimal alignment.
-% \begin{environment}{table}
-% We define the \env{table} environment.
-% Later, we will horse around with its meaning
-% in order to accomodate \cmd\floats@sw.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newenvironment{table}
-               {\@float{table}}
-               {\end@float}
-\newenvironment{table*}
-               {\@dblfloat{table}}
-               {\end@dblfloat}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\thetable}
-% Table counter and default float placement declarations.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcounter{table}
-\renewcommand\thetable{\@Roman\c@table}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Note that we give the `!' modifier by default.
-% This is an effort to avoid the syndrome wherein
-% a deferred float finds itself unqualified for 
-% placement, thereby getting carried until \cmd\clearpage.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\fps@table{tbp}
-\def\ftype@table{2}
-\def\ext@table{lot}
-\def\fnum@table{\tablename~\thetable}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% We allocate a box register for use in tallying the column inches of floats of this type.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\newbox\csname fbox@\ftype@table\endcsname
-\expandafter\setbox\csname fbox@\ftype@table\endcsname\hbox{}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\listoftables{\print@toc{lot}}%
-\let\l@table\l@figure
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\table@hook}
-% \begin{macro}{\squeezetable}
-% Assign a meaning to the hook installed into float processing.
-%
-% By default floats are \cmd\small. The \cmd\squeezetable\ declaration
-% makes them smaller (\cmd\scriptsize). In general you can locally
-% redefine \cmd\table@hook\ to be whatever you like.
-% (DPC: |\Huge\color{magenta}|\ldots?)
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\table@hook{\small}%
-\def\squeezetable{\def\table@hook{\scriptsize}}%
-\appdef\@floatboxreset{\table@hook}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Deferring \env{table} Floats}%
-%
-% After all packages are loaded, we decide
-% if tables will float or will be deferred until \cmd\printtables\ time.
-%
-% We also deal with the possibility of \env{longtable} environments.
-% 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\set@table@environments{%
- \floats@sw{}{%
-  \let@environment{longtable@float}{longtable}%
-  \let@environment{longtable}{longtable@write}%
-  \let@environment{longtable*@float}{longtable*}%
-  \let@environment{longtable*}{longtable*@write}%
-  \let@environment{turnpage@float}{turnpage}%
-  \let@environment{turnpage}{turnpage@write}%
- }%
- \do@if@floats{table}{.tbx}%
-}%
-\appdef\document@inithook{%
- \set@table@environments
-}%
-\appdef\class@enddocumenthook{%
- \printtables\relax
-}%
-\newenvironment{longtable@write}{%
- \write@@float{longtable}{table}%
-}{%
- \endwrite@float
-}%
-\newenvironment{longtable*@write}{%
- \write@@float{longtable*}{table}%
-}{%
- \endwrite@float
-}%
-\newenvironment{turnpage@write}{%
- \immediate\write\tablewrite{\string\begin{turnpage}}%
-}{%
- \immediate\write\tablewrite{\string\end{turnpage}}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\printtables}
-% The user-level command \cmd\printtables\ determines
-% where the tables are to appear in a document in which
-% \cmd\floats@sw\ is false.
-% If the user invokes the \classoption{nofloats} and fails to
-% insert a \cmd\printtables\ command, 
-% the tables will be printed at the end of the document.
-% If the command is given, but floats are not being deferred, 
-% it amounts to a no-op.
-% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{only execute if appropriate}
-% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{*-form mandates pagebreak}
-% \changes{4.0d}{2000/05/17}{make longtable trigger the head, too}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\printtables{%
- \begingroup
-  \let@environment{longtable}{longtable@float}%
-  \let@environment{longtable*}{longtable*@float}%
-  \let@environment{turnpage}{turnpage@anchored}%
-  \prepdef\longtable{\trigger@float@par}%
-  \expandafter\prepdef\csname longtable*\endcsname{\trigger@float@par}%
-  \expandafter\prepdef\csname table@floats\endcsname{%
-   \onecolumngrid@push
-  }%
-  \expandafter\appdef\csname endtable@floats\endcsname{%
-   \onecolumngrid@pop
-  }%
-  \@ifstar{\true@sw}{\floatp@sw{\true@sw}{\false@sw}}%
-  {%
-   \print@float{table}{\oneapage}%
-  }{%
-   \print@float{table}{}%
-  }%
- \endgroup
-}%
-\newenvironment{turnpage@anchored}{%
- \onecolumngrid@push
- \setbox\z@\vbox to\textwidth\bgroup
-  \columnwidth\textheight
-}{%
-  \vfil
- \egroup
- \rotatebox{90}{\box\z@}%
- \onecolumngrid@pop
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Videos}
-%\changes{4.1r}{2010/06/22}{(AO, 595) Provide \cs{lovname} along with other List of Videos definitions.}%
-%
-% \begin{environment}{video}
-% We define the \env{video} environment analogously to the 
-% \env{figure} and \env{table} environments; it is intended to contain a video.
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newenvironment{video}
- {\@float{video}}
- {\end@float}%
-\newenvironment{video*}
- {\@dblfloat{video}}
- {\end@dblfloat}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\thevideo}
-% The video counter, float placement defaults, strings.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcounter{video}
-\renewcommand \thevideo {\@arabic\c@video}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% File extension and localizable strings.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ext@video{lov}%
-\def\fname@video{Video}%
-\def\lovname{List of Videos}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Float type and default placement. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\fps@video{tbp}%
-\def\ftype@video{4}%
-\def\fnum@video{\fname@video~\thevideo}%
-\appdef\document@inithook{%
- \@ifxundefined\c@float@type{}{%
-  \global\setcounter{float@type}{8}%
- }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% We allocate a box register for use in tallying the column inches of floats of this type.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\newbox\csname fbox@\ftype@video\endcsname
-\expandafter\setbox\csname fbox@\ftype@video\endcsname\hbox{}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The documentation for the \classname{hyperref} package, \file{hyperref.dtx} states:
-% ``classes or package which introduce new elements need to define 
-%   an equivalent  \verb+\theH<name>+  for every  \verb+\the<name>+''
-% We do accordingly here.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\let\theHvideo\thevideo
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% But \file{hyperref.dtx} goes on to say, 
-% ``We do make a trap to make \verb+\theH<name>+ be the same as \verb+\arabic{<name>}+,
-% if \verb+\theH<name>+ is not defined\ldots''
-% However, it's not doing that right now (as of 6.77u), 
-% and I cannot find any such code in there anymore.
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\listofvideos{\print@toc{lov}}%
-\let\l@video\l@figure
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Deferring \env{video} Floats}%
-%
-% We determine if videos are to float or be deferred until \cmd\printvideos\ time. 
-% If so, we open the stream that will receive the deferred document portions. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\class@documenthook{%
- \do@if@floats{video}{.vdx}%
-}%
-\appdef\class@enddocumenthook{%
- \printvideos\relax
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% 
-% \begin{macro}{\printvideos}
-% The user-level command \cmd\printvideos\ determines
-% where the videos are to appear in a document in which
-% \cmd\floats@sw\ is false.
-% If the user invokes the \classoption{endfloats} class option and fails to
-% insert a \cmd\printvideos\ command, 
-% the videos will be printed at the end of the document.
-% If the command is given, but floats are not being deferred, 
-% it amounts to a no-op.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\printvideos{%
- \@ifstar{\true@sw}{\floatp@sw{\true@sw}{\false@sw}}%
- {%
-  \print@float{video}{\oneapage}%
- }{%
-  \print@float{video}{}%
- }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \section{Tabular}
-% Every APS tabular has a double (Scotch) rule above and below.
-% The column specifier ``d'' is implemented using the \classname{dcolumn}
-% package, if available.
-% FIXME: always load dcolumn!
-% \begin{macro}{\tabular@hook}
-% \begin{macro}{\endtabular@hook}
-% \begin{environment}{ruledtabular}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\endtabular@hook{}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-%\RequirePackage{dcolumn}%
-%    \end{verbatim}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\document@inithook{%
- \@ifpackageloaded{dcolumn}{%
-  \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname NC@find@d\endcsname{}{%
-   \newcolumntype{d}{D{.}{.}{-1}}%
-  }%
- }{}%
-}%
-\def\toprule{\hline\hline}%
-\def\colrule{\hline}%
-\def\botrule{\hline\hline}%
-\newenvironment{ruledtabular}{%
- \def\array@default{v}%
- \appdef\tabular@hook{\def\@halignto{to\hsize}}%
- \let\tableft@skip@default\tableft@skip
- \let\tableft@skip\tableft@skip@float
- \let\tabmid@skip@default\tabmid@skip
- \let\tabmid@skip\tabmid@skip@float
- \let\tabright@skip@default\tabright@skip
- \let\tabright@skip\tabright@skip@float
- \let\array@row@pre@default\array@row@pre
- \let\array@row@pre\array@row@pre@float
- \let\array@row@pst@default\array@row@pst
- \let\array@row@pst\array@row@pst@float
- \appdef\array@row@rst{%
-  \let\array@row@pre\array@row@pre@default
-  \let\array@row@pst\array@row@pst@default
-  \let\tableft@skip\tableft@skip@default
-  \let\tabmid@skip\tabmid@skip@default
-  \let\tabright@skip\tabright@skip@default
-  \appdef\tabular@hook{\let\@halignto\@empty}%
- }%
-}{%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \section{Footnote Text}
-%
-% \changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{single space footnotes}
-% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Frank Mittelbach, has stated in \protect\classname{multicol}: ``The kernel command \cs{@footnotetext} should not be modified.'' Thus, I have removed David Carlisle's redefinition of that command. Note, however, that later versions of \protect\classname{multicol} do not require this workaround. Belt and suspenders.}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext}
-% \begin{macro}{\@makefnmark}
-% We customize the presentation of the footnote mark: it will not be italic.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@makefntext#1{%
-  \def\baselinestretch{1}%
-  \parindent1em%
-  \noindent
-  \hb@xt@1.8em{%
-   \hss\@makefnmark
-  }%
-  #1%
-  \par
-}%
-\def\@makefnmark{%
- \hbox{%
-  \@textsuperscript{%
-   \normalfont\@thefnmark
-  }%
- }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Citations, Bibliography, Endnotes}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Bibliography}
-%
-% Load Patrick Daly's \classname{natbib} package,
-% \url{ftp://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/contrib/supported/natbib}
-%
-% Note that \classname{natbib} assumes that it loads
-% over a document class, such as the \classname{article} class, 
-% that has already defined \env{thebibliography} and \cmd\@listi.
-%
-% Note also that \classname{natbib} also installs a command
-% \cmd\NAT@set@cites\ into \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ which presumes
-% that the proper \cmd\bibpunct\ command has been issued.
-% 
-% Note that the macro \cmd\NAT@sort\ controls 
-% whether citations are left alone (\cmd\NAT@sort=0), sorted (\cmd\NAT@sort=1), or sorted and compressed (\cmd\NAT@sort=2).
-% Since we give \classname{natbib} the \classoption{sort\&compress} option,
-% if you prefer \classoption{sort}, you need only \cmd\let \cmd\NAT@sort\ to be \cmd\@ne.
-% However, if you prefer the effect of having neither \classoption{sort} nor \classoption{sort\&compress},
-% you must \cmd\let \cmd\NAT@sort\ to be \cmd\z@ and you must also define 
-% \cmd\let\cmd\NAT@cmprs\ to be \cmd\z@.
-%
-% As of version 8.2, \classname{natbib} now no longer binds at the point where it is read in.
-% This means that we can freely change \cmd\NAT@sort, \cmd\NAT@cmprs, and the new
-% \cmd\NAT@merge. Henceforth, we require that this later version be used.
-%
-% For other \classname{natbib} customizations, you may proceed as if you were going to use
-% the \file{natbib.cfg} file: anything that you can modify by this means is fair game.
-% Once \revtex\ is finished loading, you can assert any definitions for \classname{natbib} that you wish.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\rev@citet}
-% \begin{macro}{\rev@citealp}
-% \begin{macro}{\rev@citealpnum}
-% We define variants on \classname{natbib}'s commands \cmd\citet, \cmd\citealp, and \cmd\citealpnum. 
-% \cmd\rev@citealpnum\ uses a numerical citation.
-% \cmd\rev@citealp\ and \cmd\rev@citealpnum\ are the aliases of \cmd\onlinecite,
-% \cmd\rev@citet\ that of \cmd\textcite.
-% 
-% In each case, we invoke \cmd\rtx@swap@citea\ to effect different productions between 
-% multiple arguments to the \cmd\cite\ command.
-%
-% \cmd\rev@citealpnum\ provides textual citations where superscript citations are the default.
-% These should be accessible via the \cmd\citet\ command.
-%
-% Therefore we remember how to do a numerical citation
-% even when the superscript citation has been selected.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\DeclareRobustCommand
-\expandafter\rev@citet
-\expandafter{%
- \expandafter\begingroup
-  \expandafter\rtx@swap@citea
-  \expandafter\g@bblefirsttoken
-              \csname citet \endcsname
-}%
-\expandafter\DeclareRobustCommand
-\expandafter\rev@citealp
-\expandafter{%
- \expandafter\begingroup
-  \expandafter\rtx@swap@citea
-  \expandafter\g@bblefirsttoken
-              \csname citealp \endcsname
-}%
-\expandafter\DeclareRobustCommand
-\expandafter\rev@citealpnum
-\expandafter{%
- \expandafter\begingroup
-  \expandafter\rtx@swap@citenum
-  \expandafter\g@bblefirsttoken
-              \csname citealp \endcsname
-}%
-\def\rtx@swap@citenum{%
-  \rtx@swap@citea
-  \let\@cite\NAT@citenum
-  \let\NAT@mbox\mbox
-  \let\citeyear\NAT@citeyear
-  \let\NAT@space\NAT@spacechar
-}%
-\def\g@bblefirsttoken{%
- \expandafter\true@sw
- \expandafter\@empty
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\rtx@citesuper}
-% We prepare to redefine \classname{natbib}'s procedure \cmd\NAT@citesuper,
-% which is executed when setting a superscript citation.
-% The \cmd\hspace\ is removed: in any case, it
-% should really be \cmd\hspace*, to prevent an unwanted pagebreak.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\rtx@citesuper[3]{%
- \ifNAT@swa
-  \leavevmode
-  \unskip
-% \hspace{1\p@}%
-  \textsuperscript{\normalfont#1}%
-  \if*#3*\else\ (#3)\fi
- \else
-  #1%
- \fi
- \endgroup
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@makefnmark@cite}
-% We define a procedure that will set a footnote mark the same way that
-% a citation is set. If footnotes are put in the bibliography with
-% \cmd\footinbib@sw, then the corresponding mark should look the same
-% as the result of a \cmd\cite. This is how we do it.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@makefnmark@cite{\begingroup\NAT@swatrue\@cite{{\@thefnmark}}{}{}}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\rtx@bibsection}
-% Prepare to override \classname{natbib}'s definition of \cmd\bibsection.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\rtx@bibsection{%
- \@ifx@empty\refname{%
-  \par
- }{%
-% \let\@hangfroms@section\@hang@froms
-  \expandafter\section\expandafter*\expandafter{\refname}%
-  \@nobreaktrue
- }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\rtx@swap@citea}
-% \begin{macro}{\rtx@def@citea}
-% \begin{macro}{\rtx@def@citea@close}
-% \begin{macro}{\rtx@def@citea@box}
-% The procedures |\rtx@def@citea|, |\rtx@def@citea@close|, and |\rtx@def@citea@box| 
-% can take over the management of \classname{natbib}'s |\@citea| macro to effect more sophisticated
-% behavior of the punctuation between textual citations. The switch is performed by \cmd\rtx@swap@citea.
-%
-% \changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 552) Repair spacing in \cs{onlinecite}}
-% In these procedures, we use \cmd\count@\ to count the number of arguments of the \cmd\cite\ command,
-% and we use \cmd\c@NAT@ctr\ to keep track of which argument we are processing.
-% The latter counter is created by \classname{natbib} and used there solely in bibliography processing,
-% where it keeps track of the reference number. 
-% We take over its use in these macros, but only locally; therefore these procedures should work properly, even within the bibliography.
-%FIXME: check whether this is true!
-%
-% Because we are using a scratch counter \cmd\count@, we are vulnerable to other \TeX\ programmers
-% who patch in to \classname{natbib}'s processing and who might use that counter at the same time we are doing so.
-% This is a potential source of trouble for us. 
-%FIXME: store the value of \cmd\count@\ in a private \cmd\csname!
-%
-% Note that \cmd\rtx@def@citea\ begins the same as \cmd\NAT@def@citea, which it replaces, 
-% then makes further decisions based on the values of the counters. 
-%
-% Note also that, in \classname{natbib}, the replacement part of \cmd\NAT@def@citea@close\ could be rewritten as
-% \cmd\NAT@def@citea\cmd\prepdef\cmd\@citea\verb+{+\cmd\NAT@@close\verb+}+, which 
-% would them obviate the need for us to override its meaning. 
-%
-% Note, too, the effect of \cmd\rtx@def@citea@box, which replaces \cmd\NAT@def@citea@box,
-% is almost the same as the latter, except the entire \cmd\@citea\ is given as the argument
-% of \cmd\NAT@mbox.
-%
-% Finally, bear in mind that the English (and some American editors) do not place a comma
-% before the ``and''; our procedures do (but they could be rewritten with that convention). 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\rtx@swap@citea{%
- \let\NAT@def@citea\rtx@def@citea
- \let\NAT@def@citea@close\rtx@def@citea@close
- \let\NAT@def@citea@box\rtx@def@citea@box
-}%
-\def\rtx@def@citea{%
- \def\@citea{\NAT@separator\NAT@space}%
- \advance\c@NAT@ctr\@ne
- \@ifnum{\count@>\tw@}{%
-  \@ifnum{\c@NAT@ctr=\count@}{\appdef\@citea{\NAT@conj\NAT@space}}{}%
- }{%
-  \def\@citea{\NAT@space\NAT@conj\NAT@space}%
- }%
-}%
-\def\rtx@def@citea@close{%
- \rtx@def@citea
- \prepdef\@citea{\NAT@@close}%
-}%
-\def\rtx@def@citea@box{%
- \rtx@def@citea@close
- \expandafter\def\expandafter\@citea\expandafter{\expandafter\NAT@mbox\expandafter{\@citea}}%
-}%
-\def\NAT@conj{and}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\BibitemShut}
-% \begin{macro}{\bibAnnote}
-% \changes{4.1j}{2009/10/24}{(AO, 549) Repairing natbib's \cs{BibitemShut} and \cs{bibAnnote}}
-% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 549) Remove patch to natbib, which is now at version 8.31a}
-% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/07}{(AO, 578) accommodate the possible space character preceding \cs{BibitemShut}.} 
-% We remember a temporary patch to \classname{natbib}'s definition of \cmd\BibitemShut.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\NAT@BibitemShut#1{%
- \def\@bibstop{#1}%
- \let\bibitem@Stop\bibitemStop
- \let\bibitem@NoStop\bibitemNoStop
- \@ifx{\bibitemShut\relax}{\let\@bibitemShut\@empty}{%
-  \expandafter\def\expandafter\@bibitemShut\expandafter{\bibitemShut}%
- }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The following is a bug fix to \classname{natbib} version 8.31b.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\BibitemShut@ltx#1{%
- \unskip
- \def\@bibstop{#1}%
- \let\bibitem@Stop\bibitemStop
- \let\bibitem@NoStop\bibitemNoStop
- \@ifx{\bibitemShut\relax}{\let\@bibitemShut\@empty}{%
-  \expandafter\def\expandafter\@bibitemShut\expandafter{\bibitemShut}%
- }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-%\providecommand{\bibAnnote}[3]{%
-%  \BibitemShut{#1}%
-%  \def\@tempa{#3}\@ifx{\@tempa\@empty}{}{%
-%   \begin{quotation}\noindent
-%    \textsc{Key:}\ #2\\\textsc{Annotation:}\ \@tempa
-%   \end{quotation}%
-%  }%
-%  \ignorespaces
-%}%
-%\def\@bibitemShut{}%
-%    \end{verbatim}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newenvironment{thebibliography}{}{}%
-\let\@listi\@empty
-\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
- \RequirePackage[sort&compress]{natbib}[2009/11/07 8.31a (PWD, AO)]%
- \let@environment{NAT@thebibliography}{thebibliography}%
- \let@environment{thebibliography}{rtx@thebibliography}%
- \let\bibliographystyle@latex\bibliographystyle
- \let\NAT@citesuper\rtx@citesuper
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\NAT@bibsetnum}
-% \begin{macro}{\NAT@bibsetup}
-% \begin{macro}{\bibpreamble}
-% \begin{macro}{\newblock}
-% \begin{macro}{\bibnumfmt}
-% \begin{macro}{\NAT@merge}
-% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography
-% and gently coax \classname{natbib} into using
-% the formatting procedures that \emph{we} want it to use.
-%
-% This way of setting up \env{thebibliography} 
-% automatically sets the label width based on
-% the largest number used within the bibliography.
-% This scheme will not work properly using the
-% author/year style of bib entry, though.
-%
-% We define \cmd\bibnumfmt\ to be \cmd\place@bibnumber, which is a macro
-% managed by \revtex. If the document defines \cmd\bibnumfmt, then that
-% definition will be used instead, which is what the \classname{natbib}
-% package gives as its programming interface.
-%
-% We set \cmd\NAT@merge\ to \cmd\tw@, which turns on \classname{natbib}'s
-% \classname{mcite} capabilities. This is the default setting. 
-% If numerical citations are not to be used, then \cmd\NAT@merge\ 
-% should be set to \cmd\@ne\ (syntax is still enabled, but semantics are turned off). 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\let\bibsection\rtx@bibsection
-\let\NATx@bibsetnum\NAT@bibsetnum
-\def\NAT@bibsetnum#1{%
- \setlength{\topsep}{\z@}%
- \NATx@bibsetnum{\ref{LastBibItem}}%
-}%
-\let\NATx@bibsetup\NAT@bibsetup
-\def\NAT@bibsetup{%
- \setlength{\labelwidth}{\z@}%
- \setlength{\labelsep}{\z@}%
- \setlength{\itemindent}{\z@}%
- \setlength{\listparindent}{\z@}%
- \setlength{\topsep}{\z@}%
- \setlength{\parsep}{\z@}%
- \NATx@bibsetup
-}%
-\let\bibpreamble\@empty
-\def\newblock{\ }%
-\let\NATx@bibnumfmt\bibnumfmt
-\def\bibnumfmt{\place@bibnumber}%
-\let\NAT@merge\thr@@
-\let\NAT@citeyear\citeyear
-\let\onlinecite\rev@citealp
-\let\textcite\rev@citet
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The following is needed until \classname{natbib} is at 8.31b.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifx{\BibitemShut\NAT@BibitemShut}{%
- \class@info{Repairing natbib's \string\BibitemShut}%
- \let\BibitemShut\BibitemShut@ltx
-}{}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bibliographystyle}
-% \changes{4.1q}{2010/04/01}{(AO, 586) When .bbl is pasted into the document, prevent automatic bibliography inclusion.}%
-% \changes{4.1q}{2010/04/13}{(AO, 588) Only write \revtex-specific BibTeX .bib data if the .bst style is set by REVTeX.}%
-% We arrange for the selection of bibliography style
-% to occur either due to the document's explicit
-% \cmd\bibliographystyle\ statement or
-% via the journal substyle.
-%
-% Note that \revtex\ is incompatible with 
-% any package that patches \cmd\bibliographystyle.
-% Since \classname{natbib} does this, we need a fix.
-%
-% The Boolean \cmd\bibliographystyle@sw\ signifies that the document  contains explicit
-% \cmd\bibliographystyle\ markup. If, on the contrary, the bibliography style is set by
-% the the society or the journal, then no explicit \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command appears in the document instance.
-% In this case \cmd\bibliographystyle@sw\ will be \cmd\false@sw.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\let\bibliographystyle@latex\bibliographystyle
-\def\bibliographystyle{\@booleantrue\bibliographystyle@sw\def\@bibstyle}%
-\@booleanfalse\bibliographystyle@sw
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \changes{4.1j}{2009/11/03}{(AO, 551) Punctuation at end of reference when optional arguments to the cite key are given.}
-% The following had been bug fixes to \classname{natbib} version 8.31a.
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-%\def\bibitemStop{\@bibitemShut}%
-%\def\NAT@bibitem@cont{%
-% \let\bibitem@Stop\bibitemContinue
-% \let\bibitem@NoStop\bibitemContinue
-%}%
-%    \end{verbatim}
-% The following are alterations to \classname{natbib} version 8.31a to 
-% accommodate the possible space character preceding \cmd\BibitemShut,
-% and to handle the case of merged references, where the first ends with a stop character. 
-% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/07}{(AO, 578) accommodate the possible space character preceding \cs{BibitemShut}.} 
-% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/09}{(AO, 581) Handle case: merged references, with first ending in a stop character.} 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\NAT@bibitem@cont{%
- \let\bibitem@Stop\bibitemContinue@Stop
- \let\bibitem@NoStop\bibitemContinue
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bibitemNoStop{%
- \@ifx@empty\@bibitemShut{.\spacefactor\@mmm\space}{\@bibitemShut}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bibitemContinue{%
- \@ifx@empty\@bibitemShut{;\spacefactor\@mmm\space}{\@bibitemShut}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bibitemContinue@Stop{%
- \@ifx@empty\@bibitemShut{\spacefactor\@mmm\space}{\@bibitemShut}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{4.1k}{2009/11/11}{(AO, 561) remove dead code relating to \cs{bibitemContinue}} 
-% We used to customize one of the productions of \classname{natbib}, but no longer.
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-%\let\bibitemContinue\bibitemContinue@rtx
-%    \end{verbatim}
-%
-% Here ends the code to be executed at \cmd\rtx@require@packages\ time.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 516) Merged references are separated with a semicolon}
-% Redefine a macro of \classname{natbib} so that merged references are separated with a semicolon.
-% \changes{4.1k}{2009/11/11}{(AO, 561) remove dead code relating to \cs{bibitemContinue}} 
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-% \def\bibitemContinue@rtx{;\spacefactor\@mmm\space}%
-%    \end{verbatim}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\onlinecite}
-% \begin{macro}{\textcite}
-% We extend \classname{natbib}'s syntax with two commands to set a citation
-% on the baseline (as opposed to superscripted) and as text (rather than parenthetical), respectively.
-% A journal substyle that makes citations be superscripted or parenthetical as the case may be, should ensure
-% that the author has continued access to these two styles. 
-%
-% Note that the society or journal substyle override the meanings of \cmd\@onlinecite\ or
-% \cmd\@textcite\ given here.
-% 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\onlinecite{\@onlinecite}%
-\DeclareRobustCommand\textcite{\@textcite}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bibliography}
-% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
-% Provide a hook for supplying Bib\TeX\ a bibliographic database that may contain, say, 
-% footnotes.
-% 
-% Note that Bib\TeX\ chokes if the argument of the \cmd\bibdata\ command has null fields,
-% hence these tests.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\let\bibliography@latex\bibliography
-\def\bibliography#1{%
- \auto@bib@empty
- \begingroup
-  \let\auto@bib@innerbib\@empty
-  \@ifx@empty{\pre@bibdata}{%
-   \bibliography@latex{#1}%
-  }{%
-   \@if@empty{#1}{%
-    \expandafter\bibliography@latex\expandafter{\pre@bibdata}%
-   }{%
-    \expandafter\bibliography@latex\expandafter{\pre@bibdata,#1}%
-   }%
-  }%
- \endgroup
-}%
-\let\pre@bibdata\@empty
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{environment}{rtx@thebibliography}%
-% \begin{macro}{\present@bibnote}%
-% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 521) Lonely bibliography head}%
-% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
-% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/02}{(AO, 575) Automatically incorporate the (Bib\TeX-generated) .bbl into an explicit \env{thebibliography}}%
-% \changes{4.1q}{2010/04/01}{(AO, 586) When .bbl is pasted into the document, prevent automatic bibliography inclusion.}%
-% We put a tail patch into \cmd\thebibliogrphy\ and
-% a headpatch into \cmd\endthebibliography.
-%
-% Here we provide a default treatment for frontmatter notes 
-% deferred to the bibliography; a journal substyle 
-% might want to override the definition of \cmd\present@bibnote.
-%
-% We make provisions for the case where there are no \cmd\bibitem s 
-% for the bibliography: we produce no bibliography head at all.
-% 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newenvironment{rtx@thebibliography}[1]{%
- \NAT@thebibliography{#1}%
- \let\@TBN@opr\present@bibnote
- \@FMN@list
-}{%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The following line was commented out:
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-%\@endnotesinbib
-%    \end{verbatim}
-% The \cmd\auto@bib@innerbib\ directive has been moved from the begin processing to the end processing.
-% This means that the content of the \env{thebibliography} environment can itself prevent the 
-% automatic reading in of the .bbl file. This would be needed when the user has pasted in the 
-% content of the .bbl file into the document itself, something required by APS and AIP editorial direction.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
- \auto@bib@innerbib
- \edef\@currentlabel{\arabic{NAT@ctr}}%
- \label{LastBibItem}%
- \endNAT@thebibliography
- \aftergroup\auto@bib@empty
-}%
-\def\present@bibnote#1#2{%
- \item[%
-  \textsuperscript{%
-   \normalfont
-   \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{frontmatter.#1}\hyper@anchorend}%
-   \begingroup
-    \csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname#1\relax
-    \frontmatter@thefootnote
-   \endgroup
-  }%
- ]#2\par
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The following line was commented out:
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-%\global\let\NAT@bibitem@first@sw\@secondoftwo
-%    \end{verbatim}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{write@bibliographystyle}
-% \changes{4.1q}{2010/04/13}{(AO, 588) Only write \revtex-specific BibTeX .bib data if the .bst style is set by REVTeX.}%
-% We wish to delay committing the \cmd\bibliographystyle\ until as late as possible.
-% The journal substyle will define a default bibliography style, and 
-% the document's explicit \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command, if any, will override that default.
-%
-% The \cmd\bibstyle\ command is allowed appear quite late in the \file{.aux} file. 
-% We now delay the automatic writing of the \cmd\bibstyle\ command to the end of the job.
-%
-% The procedure \cmd\write@bibliographystyle\ tests whether a \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command has 
-% already been given.
-% If not, it effectively executes the needed \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command, then neutralizes itself
-% (we only need to do this once per job).
-%
-% If the document lacks explicit \cmd\bibliographystyle\ markup, we execute
-% \cmd\@bibdataout@rev, a hook for \revtex-aware processing. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\write@bibliographystyle{%
- \@ifxundefined\@bibstyle{}{%
-  \expandafter\bibliographystyle@latex\expandafter{\@bibstyle}%
-  \bibliographystyle@sw{}{\@bibdataout@rev}%
- }%
- \global\let\write@bibliographystyle\relax
-}%
-\AtEndDocument{\write@bibliographystyle}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\rtx@@citetp}
-% \begin{macro}{\rtx@citex}
-% \begin{macro}{\super@cite@let}
-% \begin{macro}{\super@cite@end}
-% \begin{macro}{\super@cite@swap}
-% We wish to extend \classname{natbib} to move spaces and citations around
-% a superscript-style citation, imitating Donald Arseneau's \classname{cite} package
-% with the \classoption{super}.
-%
-% The \cmd\rtx@@citetp\ procedure is substituted for \cmd\NAT@@citetp;
-% it then calls the \cmd\rtx@citex\ procedure and implements the features of the
-% \classoption{citeautoscript} class option.
-% In the end, \cmd\@citex\ is called with its customary parameters. 
-%
-% The document should be marked up as if citations were \emph{not} superscripted,
-% and then if you select a journal substyle that has superscripted citations, \revtex\ will do its best
-% to alter the formatting of the \cmd\cite s to accomodate superscript style.
-%
-% Only citations set as superscript are affected by this procedure,
-% because we check \cmd\@cite\ against \cmd\NAT@citesuper. 
-%
-% Here's a subtle point: when is the argument of \cmd\super@cite@swap\ not the same as the token \cmd\@let@token?
-% Answer: when the latter is \cmd\@sptoken! This case has to be handled separately.
-% 
-% Note that whether a punctuation is movable is determined by the definition
-% of a particular control sequence name.
-% A society or journal can alter things: to remove a character from the set,
-% do, say, \cmd\expandafter \cmd\let \cmd\csname \texttt{rtx@automove;} \cmd\endcsname \cmd\relax.
-% To add a character to the set, do, say, \cmd\expandafter \cmd\let \cmd\csname \texttt{rtx@automove;} \cmd\endcsname \cmd\@empty.
-%
-% Implementation note: due to a \TeX\ peculiarity, we have to check for the case
-% where \cmd\@let@token\ is a space token \emph{before} we parse forward.
-% At issue is the corner case where an end of file is at hand. If we 
-% were to let \cmd\super@cite@swap\ parse forward, we would encounter a \TeX\ end-of-file
-% error. Note that the test will be true in many distinct cases:
-% the file ends, the next character is a line terminator, the next character is a space.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\rtx@@citetp[#1]{\@ifnextchar[{\rtx@citex[#1]}{\rtx@citex[][#1]}}%
-\def\rtx@citex[#1][#2]#3{%
- \begingroup
-  \def\@tempa{[#1][#2]{#3}}%
-  \@ifx{\@cite\NAT@citesuper}{%
-   \leavevmode
-   \skip@\lastskip
-   \unskip
-   \super@cite@let
-  }{%
-   \super@cite@end
-  }%
-}%
-\def\super@cite@let{%
- \futurelet\@let@token\super@cite@check
-}%
-\def\super@cite@end{%
- \aftergroup\@citex\expandafter\endgroup\@tempa
-}%
-\def\super@cite@check{%
- \@ifx{\@let@token\@sptoken}{%
-  \super@cite@end
- }{%
-  \super@cite@swap
- }%
-}%
-\long\def\super@cite@swap#1{%
- \expandafter\@ifx\expandafter{\csname rtx@automove#1\endcsname\@empty}{%
-  #1%
-  \super@cite@let
- }{%
-  \super@cite@end
-  #1%
- }%
-}%
-\expandafter\let\csname rtx@automove.\endcsname\@empty
-\expandafter\let\csname rtx@automove,\endcsname\@empty
-\expandafter\let\csname rtx@automove:\endcsname\@empty
-\expandafter\let\csname rtx@automove;\endcsname\@empty
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The following must execute only after \classname{natbib} is loaded and has set
-% up its parameters (which it does at \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time).
-% If superscript citations have been selected, and 
-% if the \classoption{citeautoscript} class option has been selected, 
-% we patch into \classname{natbib}'s mechanism to migrate punctuation around the 
-% citation, as in class \classname{cite} with the \classoption{superscript} option.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\class@documenthook{%
- \citeautoscript@sw{%
-  \@ifx{\@cite\NAT@citesuper}{%
-   \let\NAT@@citetp\rtx@@citetp
-  }{}%
- }{}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Resolve an incompatability between \classname{natbib} and \classname{listings}.
-% The latter package tests \cmd\chapter (which has now been \cmd\let\ to \cmd\relax\ as a side effect \classname{natbib}'s use of \LaTeX's \cmd\@ifundefined).
-%
-% We couch our fix in such terms that will not be disruptive if \cmd\chapter\ is actually defined at this point.
-%
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer need to test \cs{chapter} as of \texttt{natbib} version 8.2}
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-%\@ifx{\chapter\relax}{\let\chapter\@undefined}{}%
-%    \end{verbatim}
-%
-%
-% \subsubsection{\cs{endnote}s and \cs{rtx@bibnote}s}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\mini@note}
-% \begin{macro}{\save@note}
-% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
-% QUERY: how do footnotes get thrown to the bibliography. \cmd\footinbib@sw\ appears to be irrelevant. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mini@note{\save@note\mini@notes}%Implicit #2
-\def\save@note#1#2{%
-  \stepcounter\@mpfn
-  \protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
-  \@footnotemark
-  \expandafter\g@addto@macro
-  \expandafter#1%
-  \expandafter{%
-  \expandafter \@@footnotetext
-  \expandafter {\@thefnmark}{#2}%
-              }%
-}%
-\long\def\@@footnotetext#1{\def\@thefnmark{#1}\@footnotetext}%
-\let\mini@notes\@empty
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\endnote}
-% A version of footnote that appears in the bibliography, or where \cmd\printendnotes\ appears.
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-%\def\@endnote{%
-% \begingroup
-%  \aftergroup\@footnotemark
-%  \aftergroup\@endnotetext
-%  \@ifnextchar[{%
-%   \@xendnote
-%  }{%
-%   \stepcounter{footnote}%
-%   \protected@xdef\@tempa{\thefootnote}%
-%   \expandafter\@xendnote\expandafter[\the\c@footnote]%
-% }%
-%}%
-%    \end{verbatim}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@xendnote}
-% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
-% \begin{verbatim}
-%\def\unused@xendnote[#1]{%
-%  \begingroup
-%   \c@footnote#1\relax
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% New for 4.1
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%   \unrestored@protected@xdef\@endnotelabel{Note\thefootnote}%
-%   \authoryear@sw{%
-%    \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\noexpand\ref{\@endnotelabel}}%
-%   }{%
-%    \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\@endnotelabel}%
-%   }%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Was:
-% \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{endnote\thefootnote}%
-% End 4.1 changes
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%  \endgroup
-% \endgroup
-%}%
-%\def\@endnotemark{%
-% \expandafter\cite\expandafter{\@thefnmark}%
-%}%
-% \end{verbatim}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\rev@citemark#1{%
- \expandafter\cite\expandafter{\@thefnmark}%
-}%
-\def\rev@endtext#1{%
- \let\@endnotelabel\@thefnmark
- \@endnotetext
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\endnote@ext}
-% \begin{macro}{\bibdata@app}
-% \begin{macro}{\bibdata@ext}
-% The macro \cmd\endnote@ext\ is the file extension for the auxiliary file holding footnotes.
-% The \cmd\bibdata@app\ and \cmd\bibdata@ext\ macros are used to form the name of a
-% Bib\TeX\ database file holding footnotes.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\endnote@ext{.end}%
-\def\bibdata@app{Notes}%
-\def\bibdata@ext{bib}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@endnotetext}
-% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
-% The procedure \cmd\@endnotetext\ writes a Bib\TeX\ .bib file for the purpose
-% of insering a footnote into the (numbered, unsorted) bibliography.
-%
-% We need to define \cmd\pre@bibdata\ to be 
-% \cmd\jobname\cmd\endnote@ext, and we probably should define \cmd\endnote@ext\ to 
-% be something like ``Notes.bib''.
-%
-% In each case, the material to be written out requires robustification, provided by \cmd\endnote@relax.
-% The commands \cmd\label, \cmd\index, and \cmd\glossary,
-% which are robustified for \cmd\markright\ and \cmd\addcontentsline,
-% are likewise robustified here.
-%
-% Procedure \cmd\@endnotetext@note\ is the alias for \cmd\@endnotetext\ when the endnotes are to be
-% processed separately from the bibliography (generally true when citations are not sorted).
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-%\long\def\unused@endnotetext@note#1{%
-%  \@ifxundefined\@endnoteout{%
-%    \newwrite\@endnoteout
-%    \gdef\endnote@stream{\jobname\endnote@ext}%
-%    \immediate\openout\@endnoteout\endnote@stream\relax
-%  }{}%
-%  \begingroup
-%    \endnote@relax
-%    \immediate\write\@endnoteout{\string\@doendnote{\@endnotelabel}{#1}}%
-%  \endgroup
-%}%
-%    \end{verbatim}
-%
-% \cmd\@doendnote\ is obsolete.
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-%\def\@doendnote#1#2{\bibitem{#1}#2}%
-%    \end{verbatim}
-%
-% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 579) Endnote shall comprise their own Bib\TeX\ entry type: @FOOTNOTE.} 
-% Procedure \cmd\@endnotetext\ is the operative procedure\ when the endnotes are to be
-% collated in with the other references, typically true when numerical citations are being used.
-% The technique involves writing a .bib file (\cmd\@bibdataout) with each endnote typed as 
-% a \texttt{@FOOTNOTE} entry. 
-%
-% Timing note: doing \cmd\openout\ should be deferred until the beginning of the document,
-% as is done here. This allows one to make a format (\filename{.fmt}) file out of this class.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def\@endnotetext#1{%
-  \begingroup
-    \endnote@relax
-    \immediate\write\@bibdataout{%
-     @FOOTNOTE{%
-      \@endnotelabel,%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The \texttt{key} field is recommended in cases where there is no author (see \filename{btxdoc}).
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-      key="\@endnotelabel",%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The \texttt{note} field is simply the content of the footnote.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-      note="#1"%
-     }%
-    }%
-  \endgroup
-}%
-\newwrite\@bibdataout
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\endnote@relax}
-% At \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time, we open the job's \filename{.bib} file.
-%
-% Procedure \cmd\endnote@relax\ robustifies commands that ought not to be expanded when
-% the endnote is written out.
-% Note the similarity between \cmd\endnote@relax\ and  \cmd\protected@write.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\endnote@relax{%
- \let\label\relax \let\index\relax \let\glossary\relax
- \let\cite \relax \let\ref  \relax \let\pageref \relax
- \let\(    \relax \let\)    \relax \let\\       \relax
- \let~\relax
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-%\let\protect\noexpand
-%    \end{verbatim}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
- \let \protect \@unexpandable@protect
- \newlinechar`\^^M%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-%\newlinechar`\ %
-%    \end{verbatim}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
- \let\begin\relax \let\end\relax
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@init}
-% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@aps}
-% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/10}{(AO, 580) Provide a document class option to turn off production of eprint field in bibliography.} 
-% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}%
-% \changes{4.1q}{2010/04/13}{(AO, 588) Only write \revtex-specific BibTeX .bib data if the .bst style is set by REVTeX.}%
-%\changes{4.2b}{2018/12/26}{(MD) Improve control over display of e-print ids in bibliography.}%
-% At \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time, we open the job's \filename{.bib} file.
-% The hook is available for use by a society to place its own @CONTROL record in the \cmd\@bibdataout\ stream.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\class@documenthook{\@bibdataout@init}%
-\def\@bibdataout@init{%
- \immediate\openout\@bibdataout\pre@bibdata.\bibdata@ext\relax
-}%
-\def\@bibdataout@rev{%
- \immediate\write\@bibdataout{%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The entry that controls processing of the \filename{.bst} file has entry type \texttt{@CONTROL}. 
-% The citation key (REVTEX42Control) is effectively a version number,
-% which the \filename{.bst} can use to interpret the bib entry.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  @CONTROL{%
-   REVTEX42Control%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Say if we want the \texttt{eprint} field disabled. Otherwise accept the default of the \filename{.bst}. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-   \eprint@enable@sw{}{,eprint="1"}%
-  }%
- }%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Place a \cmd\citation\ into the auxiliary file corresponding to this entry. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
- \if@filesw
-  \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{REVTEX42Control}}%
- \fi
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\printendnotes}
-% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
-% We have removed the endnotes facility from REVTeX, so the \cmd\printendnotes\ command now does nothing.
-%
-% Moving footnotes to the bibliogrphy is now accomplished through 
-% the automatic generation of a job BiB\TeX\ database (called \cmd\pre@bibdata) containing the footnotes.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\printendnotes{%
- \class@warn{The \string\printendnotes\space command no longer serves any function. Please remove it from your document.}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@endnotesinbib}
-% \begin{macro}{\@endnotesinbibliography}
-% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
-% We define a function \cmd\@endnotesinbib,
-% and a variant \cmd\@endnotesinbibliography.
-% The former is invoked at the start of 
-% the end processing for \enve{thebibliography};
-% the latter is a synonym.
-%
-% The procedure typesets the footnotes that are to 
-% appear in the bibliography; the default is to
-% simply arrange for the footnote counter to be
-% reset at the start of the document.
-%
-% Note that this code make the assumption that 
-% the counter used in \env{thebibliography} is \cmd\c@NAT@ctr.
-% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
-%
-% Here is the sole place where \cmd\footinbib@sw\ has an effect, other code simple assigning its value.
-% If it is false, or \cmd\authoryear@sw\ is true, then footnotes are handled by the default mechanism.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\make@footnote@endnote{%
- \footinbib@sw{%
-  \authoryear@sw{}{%
-   \ltx@footnote@push
-   \def\thempfn{Note\thefootnote}%
-   \let\ltx@footmark\rev@citemark
-   \let\ltx@foottext\rev@endtext
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The endnotes facility has been removed. 
-% Also, there is no need to queue up \cmd\auto@bib\ here, since it is always queued up elsewhere. 
-% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-%  \appdef\class@enddocumenthook{\auto@bib}%
-%  \let\printendnotes\relax
-%    \end{verbatim}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  }%
- }{}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ltx@footnote@push{%
- \let\ltx@footmark@latex\ltx@footmark
- \let\ltx@foottext@latex\ltx@foottext
- \let\thempfn@latex\thempfn
- \def\ltx@footnote@pop{%
-  \let\ltx@footmark\ltx@footmark@latex
-  \let\ltx@foottext\ltx@foottext@latex
-  \let\thempfn\thempfn@latex
- }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The switchover to setting footnotes in the bibliography
-% changes the meaning of \cmd\footnote\ and
-% substitutes the synonym for \cmd\@endnotesinbib. 
-%
-% We arrange for the procedure \cmd\make@footnote@endnote\ to be executed
-% at \cmd\class@documenthook\ time (we mustn't do this earlier because
-% the meaning of \cmd\@footnotemark\ must not be changed before then, 
-% for the sake of \file{ltxutil.dtx}).
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\class@documenthook{%
- \make@footnote@endnote
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\auto@bib}
-% \begin{macro}{\auto@bib@empty}
-% \begin{macro}{\test@bbl@sw}
-% \begin{macro}{\bibitem@set}
-% \begin{macro}{\auto@bib@innerbib}
-% \begin{macro}{\thebibliography@nogroup}
-% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
-% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
-% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/02}{(AO, 575) Automatically incorporate the (Bib\TeX-generated) .bbl into an explicit \env{thebibliography}}%
-% Under some circumstances, we must typeset the bibliography automatically.
-% If the document requires footnotes to be  set in the bibliography (effectively, class option \texttt{footinbib}), 
-% or that frontmatter footnotes be set in the bibliography (effectively, class option \texttt{bibnotes}), 
-% but contains no explicit \cmd\bibliography\ statement.
-%
-% Note that this facility is not able to work more than once per document.
-% If multiple bibliographys are required (e.g., per article), it will be the responsibility of the journal style
-% to restore \cmd\auto@bib\ to its original meaning so it can be re-invoked.
-% 
-% In procedure \cmd\auto@bib, we first test for the presence of frontmatter footnotes deferred to the bibliography.
-% If none, we further test for the presence of \cmd\bibitem\ commands in the job's \filename{.bbl} file.
-% If either condition is met, we ask for a bibliography. 
-% We know that the document itself lacks a \cmd\bibliography\ statement, 
-% so we know the argument of the \cmd\bibliography\ that we will issue.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\auto@bib{%
- \@ifx@empty\@FMN@list{%
-  \footinbib@sw{%
-   \@ifnum{\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname>\z@}{%
-    \true@sw
-   }{%
-    \test@bbl@sw
-   }%
-  }{%
-   \test@bbl@sw
-  }%
- }{%
-  \true@sw
- }%
- {%
-  \bibliography{}%
- }{}%
-}%
-\def\auto@bib@empty{%
- \let\auto@bib\@empty
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Testing the \filename{.bbl} file involves defanging all expected commands
-% and processing that file inside a box register (that will be simply discarded).
-% We provide a new meaning for the \cmd\bibitem\ command: it queues a Boolean.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\test@bbl@sw{%
- \setbox\z@\vbox\bgroup
-  \let\providecommand\providecommand@j@nk
-  \let\bibfield\@gobbletwo
-  \let\bibinfo\@gobbletwo
-  \let\translation\@gobble
-  \let\BibitemOpen\@empty
-  \let\bibitemStop\@empty
-  \let\bibitemNoStop\@empty
-  \let\EOS\@empty
-  \let\BibitemShut\@gobble
-  \let\bibAnnoteFile\@gobbletwo
-  \let\bibAnnote\@gobblethree
-  \let\textbf\@gobble
-  \let\emph\@gobble
-  \@booleanfalse\bibitem@sw
-  \let\bibitem\bibitem@set
-  \auto@bib@innerbib
-  \bibitem@sw{\aftergroup\true@sw}{\aftergroup\false@sw}%
- \egroup
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The \cmd\bibitem@set\ is an alias for \cmd\bibitem\ for the purpose of detecting a non-trivial bibliography.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\bibitem@set[1][]{%
- \bibitem@sw{}{%
-  \@booleantrue\bibitem@sw
-  \aftergroup\@booleantrue\aftergroup\bibitem@sw
- }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The \cmd\auto@bib@innerbib\ procedure reads in the \filename{.bbl} file (if it exists)
-% within a context where its \env{thebibliography} environment does nothing, not even establishing a group. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\auto@bib@innerbib{%
- \begingroup
-  \let@environment{thebibliography}{thebibliography@nogroup}%
-  \bibliography{}%
- \endgroup
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Environment \env{thebibliography@nogroup} is an alias of the \env{thebibliography} environment that cancels itself. 
-% It assumes that it is called within a \env{thebibliography} environment. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\thebibliography@nogroup#1{%
- \endgroup
- \def\@currenvir{thebibliography}%
-}%
-\def\endthebibliography@nogroup{\begingroup}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The following should be part of \filename{ltxutil}.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def \@gobblethree #1#2#3{}%
-\def\providecommand@j@nk#1[#2]{%
- \@ifnum{#2=\z@}{\def\j@nk}{%
-  \@ifnum{#2=\@ne}{\def\j@nk##1}{%
-   \@ifnum{#2=\tw@}{\def\j@nk##1##2}{%
-    \@ifnum{#2=\thr@@}{\def\j@nk##1##2##3}{%
-    }%
-   }%
-  }%
- }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \section{Initial setup}
-% 
-% The standard LaTeX document classes execute certain commands 
-% that are best deferred until \cmd\class@documenthook\ time.
-% Here, we effectively split \cmd\pagenumbering\ into two halves,
-% with a default definition for \cmd\thepage
-% and an initialization of \cmd\c@page\ at \cmd\class@documenthook\ time.
-%
-% The meaning of \cmd\thepage\ can be overridden by society, journal, or
-% anywhere within the document pramble, and the counter itself will be 
-% preset at the beginning of the document. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\thepage{\@arabic\c@page}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer assignment until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}
-% Note that this code is executed at \cmd\setup@hook\ time 
-% to allow for the possibility of overrides by packages like \classname{geometry}.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\setup@hook{%
- \tabbingsep \labelsep
- \leftmargin\leftmargini
- \labelwidth\leftmargin\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
- \let\@listi\@listI
- \@listi
-}%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%
-% We ensure that the ``environment'' component mark (implemented by \file{ltxgrid.dtx}) 
-% is initialized properly (via a hook, itself defined via \file{ltxutil.dtx}). 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\class@documenthook{%
- \global\c@page\@ne
- \def\curr@envir{document}%
- \mark@envir{\curr@envir}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\open@onecolumn}%
-% \begin{macro}{\open@column@two}%
-% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Grid changes with ltxgrid}
-% \changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{Also alter how lists get indented.}
-% When setting the column grid, we have to override the procedure
-% for formatting lists. 
-% Because \cmd\twocolumngrid\ requires rebalancing columns at some points, 
-% typesetting must employ only the manipulation of 
-% \cmd\leftskip\ and \cmd\rightskip, and must avoid the use of
-% \cmd\moveleft, \cmd\moveright, and \cmd\parshape. 
-%
-% It is one of the stranger features of \TeX\ that these two separate
-% mechanisms exist. The latter three have the effect of adding things to the 
-% Main Vertical List that cannot be removed and later added back with all their
-% properties intact.
-%
-% In detail, \cmd\moveleft, say, adds a box to the MVL with
-% its reference point shifted horizontally by some amount relative to the 
-% reference point of the enclosing list. If that box is removed from the 
-% MVL (via a \cmd\lastbox\ operation in the output routine), and later
-% thrown back to the MVL, the shift of the box will have been ``forgotten'' by \TeX.
-% This is a bug, but not one ``acceptible to D. E. Knuth'', so it will never be fixed. 
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\open@onecolumn{%
- \open@column@one\@ne
- \set@colht
- \@floatplacement
- \@dblfloatplacement
-}%
-\def\open@twocolumn{%
- \open@column@mlt\tw@
- \set@colht
- \@floatplacement
- \@dblfloatplacement
- \sloppy
- \let\set@listindent\set@listindent@
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \section{\cs{appendix}}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%\newif\ifappendixon
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Note that, within appendices, 
-% equations are numbered within sections (appendices).
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\appendix{%
- \par
-%\appendixontrue
- \setcounter{section}\z@
- \setcounter{subsection}\z@
- \setcounter{subsubsection}\z@
- \def\thesubsection{\arabic{subsection}}%
- \def\thesubsubsection{\alph{subsubsection}}%
- \@addtoreset{equation}{section}%
- \def\theequation@prefix{\thesection}%
- \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\appendix}%
- \@ifstar{%
-  \def\thesection{\unskip}%
-  \def\theequation@prefix{A.}%
- }{%
-  \def\thesection{\Alph{section}}%
- }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \section{Changing the page grid}
-% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Define three separate environments, defer assignment to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}
-%
-% \subsection{Avoiding Grid Changes}%
-%
-% In preprint styles, ``wide text'' is a no-op, and the title page
-% processing involves no grid change.
-% 
-% \begin{macro}{\title@column}%
-% \begin{macro}{\close@column}%
-% Provide default meanings for \cmd\title@column\ and \cmd\close@column,
-% in case they were never defined. 
-% Note that the society or journal substyle may define 
-% \cmd\title@column\ or \cmd\close@column: this code will not override. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\title@column#1{%
- \minipagefootnote@init
- #1%
- \minipagefootnote@foot
-}%
-\def\close@column{%
- \newpage
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Galley Style: Margin Changes}%
-% A variant of preprint processing. Emulate journal appearance somewhat.
-%
-% \begin{environment}{widetext@galley}
-% DPC: We're in galley style so do a lob sided display environment.
-%
-% QUERY: How can we be sure that we are in galley style?
-% ANSWER: as noted elsewhere, require that both \cmd\twocolumn@sw\ and \cmd\preprintsty@sw\ be false.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\galley@outdent{\rightmargin-\columnwidth\advance\rightmargin-\columnsep}%
-\let\widetext@outdent\@empty
-\newenvironment{widetext@galley}{%
-  \list{}{%
-    \topsep        \z@skip
-    \listparindent \parindent
-    \itemindent    \parindent
-    \leftmargin    \z@
-    \parsep        \z@\@plus\p@
-    \widetext@outdent
-    \relax
-  }%
-  \item\relax
-}{
-  \endlist
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Grid Changing Via \classname{ltxgrid}}%
-%
-% In case \classoption{twocolumngrid} has been invoked,
-% switch column grid using the column grid-changing commands.
-% Supply stub definitions of those commands here.
-% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\title@column@grid}%
-% \begin{macro}{\close@column@grid}%
-% The title block always starts at the top of a new page.
-% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid}
-%
-% Note that, for the procedure \cmd\close@column@grid,
-% we balance columns by switching to the one-column page grid. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\title@column@grid#1{%
- \minipagefootnote@init
-  \onecolumngrid
-  \begingroup
-   \let\@footnotetext\frontmatter@footnotetext
-%<ignore>  \let\set@footnotewidth\set@footnotewidth@two
-   \ltx@no@footnote
-   #1%
-  \endgroup
-  \twocolumngrid
- \minipagefootnote@foot
-}%
-\def\close@column@grid{%
- \balancelastpage@sw{%
-  \onecolumngrid
-%<ignore>  \twocolumngrid
- }{}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{environment}{widetext@grid}
-% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes via ltxgrid procedures}
-% \changes{4.0e}{2000/11/21}{adornments above and below.}
-% \changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 525) Remove phantom paragraph above display math that is given in vertical mode}%
-% We slip into the one-column page grid
-% within the scope of this environment.
-%
-% Note that we set adornments above and below the \env{widettext}.
-% These are set as leaders, so they will disappear at a page break.
-% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO) fine-tune spacing above and below widetext}%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newenvironment{widetext@grid}{%
-  \par\ignorespaces
-  \setbox\widetext@top\vbox{%
-%<ignore>  \vskip15\p@
-   \hb@xt@\hsize{%
-    \leaders\hrule\hfil
-    \vrule\@height6\p@
-   }%
-%<ignore>  \vskip6\p@
-  }%
-  \setbox\widetext@bot\hb@xt@\hsize{%
-    \vrule\@depth6\p@
-    \leaders\hrule\hfil
-  }%
-  \onecolumngrid
-  \vskip10\p@
-  \dimen@\ht\widetext@top\advance\dimen@\dp\widetext@top
-  \cleaders\box\widetext@top\vskip\dimen@
-%<ignore> \let\set@footnotewidth\set@footnotewidth@two
-  \vskip6\p@
-  \prep@math@patch
-}{%
-  \par
-  \vskip6\p@
-  \setbox\widetext@bot\vbox{%
-   \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\box\widetext@bot}%
-%<ignore>  \vskip14\p@
-  }%
-  \dimen@\ht\widetext@bot\advance\dimen@\dp\widetext@bot
-  \cleaders\box\widetext@bot\vskip\dimen@
-  \vskip8.5\p@
-  \twocolumngrid\global\@ignoretrue
-  \@endpetrue
-}%
-\newbox\widetext@top
-\newbox\widetext@bot
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-%
-% Decide, finally, how the page grid is to be manipulated.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\set@page@grid{%
- \twocolumn@sw{%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The following two assignments determine what procedures are to be executed when 
-% the footnote set width is calculated, and how footnotes are to be composed at the bottom of the page. 
-% A society or journal wishing to do otherwise will override this code. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \let\set@footnotewidth\set@footnotewidth@two
-  \let\compose@footnotes\compose@footnotes@two
-  \let@environment{widetext}{widetext@grid}%
-  \let\title@column\title@column@grid
-  \let\close@column\close@column@grid
- }{%
-  \let@environment{widetext}{widetext@galley}%
-  \preprintsty@sw{%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Change the page grid not at all.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  }{%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% If we are galley style, change the page margin only.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-   \galley@sw{%
-    \let\widetext@outdent\galley@outdent
-   }{}%
-  }%
- }%
-}%
-\appdef\setup@hook{\set@page@grid}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \section{Old font commands}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm}
-\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf}
-\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt}
-\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf}
-\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit}
-\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl}
-\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc}
-\DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal}
-\DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \section{English-Language Texts}
-% As this class is just for English language journals, we
-% could hardwire these texts,
-% but to make it easier to use this as a
-% basis for the code for similar journal styles, separate out all the
-% fixed text strings into babel-style macros of the form 
-% |\|\ldots|name|
-%
-% Note: for babel compatability, use version 1999/05/05 v3.6x or later.
-%
-% Some of these might need changing in the society-specific code.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\today}
-% Procedure \cmd\today\ is used in the article class, but not in 
-% this document class.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\today{\ifcase\month\or
-  January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
-  July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
-  \space\number\day, \number\year}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\notesname}
-% Text entity \cmd\notesname\ had been used in \cmd\printendnotes.
-% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
-% However, we have removed the endnotes facility from REVTeX.
-% 
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-%\def\notesname{Notes}
-%    \end{verbatim}
-%    \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\partname}
-% Text entity \cmd\partname\ is used in \cmd\@part.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\partname{Part}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\tocname}
-% Text entity \cmd\tocname\ is used in \cmd\tableofcontents,
-% as defined in the standard \LaTeX\ book class.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\tocname{Contents}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\lofname}
-% Text entity \cmd\lofname\ is used in \cmd\listoffigures,
-% as defined in the standard \LaTeX\ book class.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\lofname{List of Figures}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\lotname}
-% Text entity \cmd\lotname\ is used in \cmd\listoftables,
-% as defined in the standard \LaTeX\ book class.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\lotname{List of Tables}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\refname}
-% Text entity \cmd\refname\ is used in \env{thebibliography}.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\refname{References}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\indexname}
-% Text entity \cmd\indexname\ is used in \env{theindex},
-% as defined in the standard \LaTeX\ book class.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\indexname{Index}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\figurename}
-% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{figuresname}}
-% Text entity \cmd\figurename\ is used in \env{figure},
-% \cmd\figuresname\ in \cmd\printfigures.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\figurename{FIG.}
-\def\figuresname{Figures}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\tablename}
-% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{tablesname}}
-% Text entity \cmd\tablename\ is used in \env{table},
-% \cmd\tablesname\ in \cmd\printtables.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\tablename{TABLE}
-\def\tablesname{Tables}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\abstractname}
-% Text entity \cmd\abstractname\ is used in \env{abstract}.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\abstractname{Abstract}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\appendixesname}
-% \begin{macro}{\appendixname}
-% Text entity \cmd\appendixesname\ is used in TOC.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\appendixesname{Appendixes}%
-\def\appendixname{Appendix}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \end{macro}
-%    \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\acknowledgmentsname}
-% Text entity \cmd\acknowledgmentsname\ is used in \env{acknowledgments}.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\acknowledgmentsname{Acknowledgments}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\journalname}
-% This should be set by the society journal options, eg `pra'.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\journalname{??}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\copyrightname}
-% Default layout does not assign copyright, but a journal that wants
-% to might use this.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\copyrightname{??}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\andname}
-% The text string ``and'' for use in author lists.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\andname{and}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@pacs@name}
-% \begin{macro}{\@keys@name}
-% The text string prepended to PACS numbers, resp. to keywords.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@pacs@name{PACS numbers: }%
-\def\@keys@name{Keywords: }%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \end{macro}
-%    \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ppname}
-% The text string ``pp'' for use in page ranges.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ppname{pp}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\numbername}
-% The text string ``number'' for use in article reference.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\numbername{number}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\volumename}
-% The text string ``volume'' for use in article reference.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\volumename{volume}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\Dated@name}
-% \begin{macro}{\Received@name}
-% \begin{macro}{\Revised@name}
-% \begin{macro}{\Accepted@name}
-% \begin{macro}{\Published@name}
-% These texts are used in the \cmd\date, et al. commands.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\Dated@name{Dated: }%
-\def\Received@name{Received }%
-\def\Revised@name{Revised }%
-\def\Accepted@name{Accepted }%
-\def\Published@name{Published }%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \end{macro}
-%    \end{macro}
-%    \end{macro}
-%    \end{macro}
-%    \end{macro}
-%
-% \section{Legacy Commands}
-% We define some commands left over from version 3.1, or give default meanings.
-% Some definitions can be overridden
-% in the document preamble or in included packages.
-%
-% Note on the namespace: command names like \cmd\REV@\emph{name} are used here,
-% because it is not clear that any of this code is generally useful.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\address{\replace@command\address\affiliation}%
-\def\altaddress{\replace@command\altaddress\altaffiliation}%
-\newenvironment{references}{%
- \class@warn@end{The references environment is not supported; use thebibliography instead.}
- \gdef\references{\thebibliography{}}\references
-}{%
- \endthebibliography
-}%
-\def\draft{%
- \class@warn@end{Command \string\draft\space is obsolete;^^JInvoke option draft instead.}%
- \@booleantrue\draft@sw
-}%
-\def\tighten{%
- \class@warn@end{Command \string\tighten\space is obsolete;^^JInvoke option tightenlines instead.}%
- \@booleantrue\tightenlines@sw
-}%
-\def\tableline{%
- \noalign{%
-  \class@warn@end{Command \string\tableline\space is obsolete;^^JUse \string\colrule\space instead.}%
-  \global\let\tableline\colrule
- }%
- \tableline
-}%
-\def\case{\replace@command\case\frac}%
-\def\slantfrac{\replace@command\slantfrac\frac}%
-\def\tablenote{\replace@command\tablenote\footnote}%
-\def\tablenotemark{\replace@command\tablenotemark\footnotemark}%
-\def\tablenotetext{\replace@command\tablenotetext\footnotetext}%
-% Lose the following definition:
-\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@text[1]{%
- \relax
- \ifmmode
-  \mathchoice
-   {\hbox{{\everymath{\displaystyle     }#1}}}%
-   {\hbox{{\everymath{\textstyle        }#1}}}%
-   {\hbox{{\everymath{\scriptstyle      }\let\f@size\sf@size\selectfont#1}}}%
-   {\hbox{{\everymath{\scriptscriptstyle}\let\f@size\ssf@size\selectfont#1}}}%
-  \glb@settings
- \else
-  \mbox{#1}%
- \fi
-}%
-% Lose the following definition:
-\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@bbox[1]{%
- \relax
- \ifmmode
-  \mathchoice
-   {\hbox{{\everymath{\displaystyle     }\boldmath$#1$}}}%
-   {\hbox{{\everymath{\textstyle        }\boldmath$#1$}}}%
-   {\hbox{{\everymath{\scriptstyle      }\boldmath$#1$}}}%
-   {\hbox{{\everymath{\scriptscriptstyle}\boldmath$#1$}}}%
-  \glb@settings
- \else
-  \mbox{#1}%
- \fi
-}%
-\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@bm[1]{%
- \class@warn@end{To use \string\bm, please load the bm package!}%
- \global\let\bm\relax
-}%
-\def\FL{\obsolete@command\FL}%
-\def\FR{\obsolete@command\FR}%
-\def\narrowtext{\obsolete@command\narrowtext}%
-\def\mediumtext{\obsolete@command\mediumtext}%
-\newenvironment{quasitable}{%
- \let@environment{tabular}{longtable}%
-}{%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\text}
-% \begin{macro}{\bm}
-% \begin{macro}{\bibinfo}
-% \begin{macro}{\eprint}
-% \begin{macro}{\url}
-% 
-% If not otherwise defined, give default meanings to certain commands.
-% \changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{eprint takes an optional argument, syntactical only in this case.}
-%FIXME: \cmd\bibinfo?
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\let\text\REV@text
-\let\bm\REV@bm
-\appdef\setup@hook{%
- \providecommand\bibinfo[2]{#2}%
- \providecommand\eprint[2][]{#2}%
-%\providecommand\url[1]{#1}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbox}
-% 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbox#1{%
- \class@warn@end{\string\bbox\space is obsolete,^^Jload the bm package and use \string\bm\space instead.}%
- \global\let\bbox\relax
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\mathletters}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newenvironment{mathletters}{%
- \class@warn@end{Environment {mathletters} is obsolete;^^Jload the amsmath package and use {subequations}!}%
- \global\let\mathletters\@empty
-}{%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\eqnum}
-% 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\eqnum#1{%
- \class@warn@end{\string\eqnum\space is obsolete, load the amsmath package and use \string\tag!}%
- \global\let\eqnum\@gobble
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% We read in the symbol definitions.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
- \RequirePackage{revsymb4-2}%
-}%
-\appdef\class@documenthook{\revsymb@inithook}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \section{Corrected Indentation for \texttt{tableofcontents}}
-% \changes{4.2a}{2014/12/31}{(MD, Aptara) Make titles in bibliography default, prb style to follow other Phys. Rev. journals, add a unified physrev option as well as prx, prapplied, prmaterials, prfluids, prab, and prper options. Corrected indentation for tableofcontents appearing along with listoffigure/listoftable.}%
-%
-% Corrected indentation for \texttt{tableofcontents}, when appearing with \texttt{listoffigure} or \texttt{listoftable}.
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%%
-\def\@startflt#1{%
-  \begingroup
-    %\toc@pre
-    \makeatletter
-    \@input{\jobname.#1}%
-    \if@filesw
-      \expandafter\newwrite\csname tf@#1\endcsname
-      \immediate\openout \csname tf@#1\endcsname \jobname.#1\relax
-    \fi
-    \@nobreakfalse
-    %\toc@post
-  \endgroup
-}%
-\def\att@TOC{toc}%
-\def\print@toc#1{%
- \begingroup
-  \expandafter\section
-  \expandafter*%
-  \expandafter{%
-              \csname#1name\endcsname
-              }%
-  \let\appendix\appendix@toc
-  \def\tempa{#1}%
-  \ifx\tempa\att@TOC%%
-  \@starttoc{#1}%
-  \else%%
-  \@startflt{#1}%%
-  \fi%%
- \endgroup
-}%
-%%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \section{Patches for lineno.sty}
-%
-% The \classname{lineno} package detects the case where the package has been loaded
-% and the document invokes \cmd\linelabel, but the \cmd\linenumbers\ command has not been
-% issued: it treats this case as an error. 
-%
-% It is wrong for validity of document syntax to be dependent upon package semantics: 
-% we make the condition a warning rather than an error.  
-% 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@LN@LLerror@org{%
- \PackageError{lineno}{%
-  \string\linelabel\space without \string\linenumbers
- }{% 
-  Just see documentation. (New feature v4.11)%
- }%
- \@gobble
-}%
-\def\@LN@LLerror@ltx{%
- \PackageWarning{lineno}{%
-  To make the \string\linelabel\space command work, you must issue the \string\linenumbers\ command 
- }%
- \@gobble
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% 
-% If appropriate, enable line numbering within the abstract. 
-%
-% This mechanism applies generally:
-% Create the box in a context in which the meaning of \cmd\par\ has been patched by \classname{lineno},
-% then \cmd\unvbox\ the box in a context where \cmd\set@linepenalties\ has been executed, and 
-% follow up with \cmd\@linenumberpar, which forces a visit to the output routine just there.
-% Note that here, we have to de-fang \cmd\@LN@parpgbrk, which would otherwise causes the appearance
-% of a box with depth -1000 points. Go figure.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\class@documenthook{%
- \@ifx{\@LN@LLerror\@LN@LLerror@org}{%
-  \class@info{Overriding \string\@LN@LLerror}%
-  \let\@LN@LLerror\@LN@LLerror@ltx
- }{}%
- \@ifpackageloaded{lineno}{%
-  \@ifxundefined{\set@linepenalties}{}{%
-   \def\prep@absbox{\set@linepenalties}%
-   \def\post@absbox{\let\@LN@parpgbrk\@empty\@linenumberpar}%
-  }%
- }{}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% One may well ask: how to obtain line numbering within an alignment in a float?
-% This objective, along with line numbering within footnotes, would require extraordinary measures.
-% The float would have to be thrown onto the MVL in order to acquire its line numbers, but
-% that fragment of MVL would then have to be protected from being shipped out.
-% The question of how to coordinate those lines' numbers with those of lines in the MVL would 
-% also require dealing with.
-%
-% \section{Endgame for the Document Class}
-%
-% We provide for a ``job macro package'' that can override
-% definitions and assignments made by the class or any other packages it loads.
-%
-% \subsection{Job Macro Package}
-% You can create a ``job macro package'' for your document
-% that will be read in automatically every time
-% your document is processed.
-% Thus, if your job is a file called \file{myarticle.tex},
-% then the file \file{myarticle.rty} will be read in
-% just the same as if you had placed a 
-% \cmd\usepackage|{myarticle.rty}| statement
-% immediately following your \cmd\documentclass\ statement.
-%
-% Within your \file{.rty} file,
-% you can define and use control sequence names that use the |@| character
-% and you can override any of the definitions or assignments made 
-% by the \revtex\ document class or the selected journal substyle.
-% That is, you have the power to really mess things up badly.
-%
-% If you choose to have a job macro package, you are well 
-% advised to read the \LaTeX\ guide to document classes,
-% \file{clsguide.tex} or read up on the subject 
-% in a book like the \LaTeX\ Companion.
-%
-% The file \file{template.rty} contains a template for
-% creating your own job macro package.
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
- \InputIfFileExists{\jobname.rty}{}{}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Endgame Processing for the Document Class}
-%
-% The remaining steps in processing the document class involve
-% determining the needed society, journal, and pointsize from 
-% the document's class options and inputting the needed files or
-% executing the indicated procedures. 
-%
-% Note that the society file is expected to declare options that will
-% allow us to determine the journal involved, and the society and journal
-% themselves determine the which pointsize options are declared, along with
-% their meanings. 
-% 
-% Note also that required packages are read in only after the document options
-% have been processed, because the latter can affect the former. 
-% 
-% Finally, the setup code is executed: this is code that depends on the 
-% meanings of the switches we define and on the code within the packages we load. 
-%
-% Note that there are other hooks in use: \cmd\document@inithook, which is 
-% executed right at the beginning of the document, and \cmd\class@documenthook, 
-% which serves as a vehicle for any \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ code we might wish to
-% execute. 
-%
-%FIXME: use \cmd\class@documenthook\ only for things that bear on the MVL; 
-% use \cmd\document@inithook\ for all patches to procedures defined within the preamble. 
-%
-% Remember that \classname{natbib} changes its state at \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time,
-% so we have to install our own code at a later point in the processing.
-%
-% We determine the proper \cmd\@society\ by examining the document's class options. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@parse@class@options@society
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Then, we input the society's substyle
-% (which may in turn lead to loading a journal substyle or a pointsize substyle). 
-% The substyle should not assume the value of any class option: 
-% instead, it should install code into \cmd\setup@hook. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@process@society{aps}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now that the society has defined the class options relating to journals,
-% and has defined \cmd\@journal@default, we can process the journal substyle. 
-% We parse the options for one that sets \cmd\@journal.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@parse@class@options@\@journal
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% And we process the journal. 
-% Note that \emph{it is an error} for a society file to fail to define
-% \cmd\@journal@default.
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\@process@journal\expandafter{\@journal@default}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now that the society and journal have finished defining any options relating to 
-% point size, we process the class options for any that set \cmd\@pointsize.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@parse@class@options@\@pointsize
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% And we process the pointsize.
-% Note that it is an error for the society and journal to leave \cmd\@pointsize@default\ 
-% undefined at this point, however, the journal may have overriden the assignment of the society. 
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\@process@pointsize\expandafter{\@pointsize@default}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Next, we process the class options for once and all. 
-% Doing so sets values for some of the Booleans that were introduced along with
-% the \cmd\DeclareOption\ statements above. 
-%
-%CHANGE: We process the options in the order declared in the document; this 
-% gives the document greater control. 
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@options
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% 
-% Now that the class options have been processed, we can load all the 
-% packages that we know need loading.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\rtx@require@packages
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% At this point, the society substyle, the journal substyle, and the 
-% pointsize have all been processed, along with the document class options.
-% Some of these have left things for later; we do these now.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\setup@hook}
-%
-% This portion of the code for this class file
-% \emph{must} appear at the very end:
-% The procedure 
-% \cmd\setup@hook\
-% should be executed at the very end of the class file. 
-% Any code that relies on the value of any of the \texttt{@sw} switches
-% or will patch the code of one of the required packages
-% should be executed here. 
-%\changes{4.2a}{2017/11/28}{(MD) Add call to \normalsize to be a good citizen and allow booktabs.sty to work properly}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\setup@hook{\normalsize}%
-\setup@hook
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% Warn if past maturation date. This code to be enabled only in beta software.
-% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 522) Warn if software is expired}%
-% \changes{4.1h}{2009/10/09}{(AO) Remove expiry code in the release software}%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%<*ignore>
- \def\rtx@fin@year{2010}%
- \def\rtx@fin@month{01}%
- \def\rtx@fin@day{01}%
- \def\rtx@fin@warn{%
-  \@ifnum{\rtx@fin@year>\the\year\relax}{\true@sw}{%
-   \@ifnum{\rtx@fin@month>\the\month\relax}{\true@sw}{%
-    \@ifnum{\rtx@fin@day>\the\day\relax}{\true@sw}{%
-     \false@sw
-    }%
-   }%
-  }%
-  {%
-   \class@info{Beta software expires \rtx@fin@year-\rtx@fin@month-\rtx@fin@day; updates available at https://journals.aps.org/revtex/}%
-  }{%
-   \class@warn{Outdated software expired \rtx@fin@year-\rtx@fin@month-\rtx@fin@day; please retrieve an update at https://journals.aps.org/revtex/}%
-  }%
- }%
-%</ignore>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% In shipping (non-beta) software, the following line should be commented out.
-% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 522) Warn if software is expired}%
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-%\appdef\class@enddocumenthook{\rtx@fin@warn}%
-%    \end{verbatim}
-%
-% End of the class file.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%</package>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \section{Symbols: the \texttt{revsymb} module}
-% We immediately define a utility command: this module's warning.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%<*revsymb>
-\def\REVSYMB@warn#1{\PackageWarningNoLine{revsymb}{#1}}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\lambdabar}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\lambdabar{%
-  \bgroup
-    \def\@tempa{%
-      \hbox{%
-        \raise.73\ht\z@
-        \hb@xt@\z@{%
-          \kern.25\wd\z@
-          \vrule \@width.5\wd\z@\@height.1\p@\@depth.1\p@
-          \hss
-        }%
-        \box\z@
-      }%
-    }%
-    \mathchoice
-      {\setbox\z@\hbox{$\displaystyle     \lambda$}\@tempa}%
-      {\setbox\z@\hbox{$\textstyle        \lambda$}\@tempa}%
-      {\setbox\z@\hbox{$\scriptstyle      \lambda$}\@tempa}%
-      {\setbox\z@\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\lambda$}\@tempa}%
-  \egroup
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\openone}
-% DPC: Really should use a font that includes this glyph.
-% Unfortunately not in AMS ones, but is in bbold, cmbb.
-% (I think, must check),
-% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{use font-dependent spacing}
-% FIXME: check for bbold.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\openone{\leavevmode\hbox{\small1\normalsize\kern-.33em1}}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\corresponds}
-% \begin{macro}{\overdots}
-% \begin{macro}{\overcirc}
-% J\"org Knappen suggests the replacements:
-% replace \cmd\corresponds\ with \cmd\triangleq, source \classname{amssymb};
-% replace \cmd\overcirc\ with \cmd\mathring, source \classname{latex2e};
-% replace \cmd\overdots\ with \cmd\dddot, source \classname{amsmath}.
-%
-% Any use of any of these commands will result in a warning message at the end 
-% of the log file. If the corresponding package is not loaded, a
-% definition will quietly be provided.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\corresponds{\replace@command\corresponds\triangleq}%
-\DeclareRobustCommand\overcirc{\replace@command\overcirc\mathring}%
-\DeclareRobustCommand\overdots{\replace@command\overdots\dddot}%
-\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@triangleq{%
- {\lower.2ex\hbox{=}}{\kern-.75em^\triangle}%
-}%
-\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@dddot[1]{%
- \@ontopof{#1}{\cdots}{1.0}\mathord{\box2}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\succsim}
-% \begin{macro}{\precsim}
-% \begin{macro}{\lesssim}
-% \begin{macro}{\gtrsim}
-% \begin{macro}{\alt}
-% \begin{macro}{\agt}
-% These version 3.1 commands are always supplied, 
-% but the definitions in \classname{amssymb} are preferred.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\altsuccsim{\succ\kern-.9em_\sim\kern.3em}%
-\DeclareRobustCommand\altprecsim{\prec\kern-1em_\sim\kern.3em}%
-\let\REV@succsim\altsuccsim
-\let\REV@precsim\altprecsim
-\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@lesssim{\mathrel{\mathpalette\vereq{<}}}%
-\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@gtrsim{\mathrel{\mathpalette\vereq{>}}}%
-\DeclareRobustCommand\alt{\lesssim}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\agt{\gtrsim}
-\def\vereq#1#2{%
- \lower3\p@\vbox{%
-  \baselineskip1.5\p@
-  \lineskip1.5\p@
-  \ialign{$\m@th#1\hfill##\hfil$\crcr#2\crcr\sim\crcr}%
- }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\tensor}
-% \begin{macro}{\overstar}
-% \begin{macro}{\loarrow}
-% \begin{macro}{\roarrow}
-% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: remove duplicates}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\tensor[1]{\@ontopof{#1}{\leftrightarrow}{1.15}\mathord{\box2}}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\overstar[1]{\@ontopof{#1}{\ast}{1.15}\mathord{\box2}}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\loarrow[1]{\@ontopof{#1}{\leftarrow}{1.15}\mathord{\box2}}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\roarrow[1]{\@ontopof{#1}{\rightarrow}{1.15}\mathord{\box2}}
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@ontopof}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@ontopof#1#2#3{%
- {%
-  \mathchoice
-    {\@@ontopof{#1}{#2}{#3}\displaystyle     \scriptstyle      }%
-    {\@@ontopof{#1}{#2}{#3}\textstyle        \scriptstyle      }%
-    {\@@ontopof{#1}{#2}{#3}\scriptstyle      \scriptscriptstyle}%
-    {\@@ontopof{#1}{#2}{#3}\scriptscriptstyle\scriptscriptstyle}%
- }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@@ontopof}
-% Same as \revtex3, more or less.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@@ontopof#1#2#3#4#5{%
-  \setbox\z@\hbox{$#4#1$}%
-  \setbox\f@ur\hbox{$#5#2$}%
-  \setbox\tw@\null\ht\tw@\ht\z@ \dp\tw@\dp\z@
-  \@ifdim{\wd\z@>\wd\f@ur}{%
-    \setbox\f@ur\hb@xt@\wd\z@{\hss\box\f@ur\hss}%
-    \mathord{\rlap{\raise#3\ht\z@\box\f@ur}\box\z@}%
-  }{%
-    \setbox\f@ur\hb@xt@.9\wd\f@ur{\hss\box\f@ur\hss}%
-    \setbox\z@\hb@xt@\wd\f@ur{\hss$#4\relax#1$\hss}%
-    \mathord{\rlap{\copy\z@}\raise#3\ht\z@\box\f@ur}%
-  }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\frak}
-% Deal with legacy \cmd\frak:
-% if \classname{amsfonts} not loaded, defined in such a way as to ask for that package.
-% Also, says to use \cmd\mathfrak\ instead.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\frak{%
- \REVSYMB@warn{%
-  Command \string\frak\space unsupported:^^J%
-  please use \string\mathfrak\space instead.%
- }%
- \global\let\frak\mathfrak
- \frak
-}%
-\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@mathfrak{%
- \REVSYMB@warn{%
-  Command \string\mathfrak\space undefined:^^J%
-  please specify the amsfonts or amssymb option!%
- }%
- \global\let\mathfrak\@firstofone
- \mathfrak
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\Bbb}
-% Deal with legacy \cmd\Bbb:
-% if \classname{amsfonts} not loaded, defined in such a way as to ask for that package.
-% Also, says to use \cmd\mathbb\ instead.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\Bbb{%
- \REVSYMB@warn{%
-  Command \string\Bbb\space unsupported:^^J%
-  please use \string\mathbb\space instead.%
- }%
- \global\let\Bbb\mathbb
- \Bbb
-}%
-\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@mathfrak{%
- \REVSYMB@warn{%
-  Command \string\mathbb\space undefined:^^J%
-  please specify the amsfonts or amssymb option!%
- }%
- \global\let\mathbb\@firstofone
- \mathbb
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\Bigglb}
-% Deal with legacy bold delimiters. 
-% Each of the following takes an implicit argument consisting of
-% the delimiter to be made big and bold.
-% FIXME: \cmd\DeclareBoldMathCommand\ is not the right tool!
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\Bigglb{\REV@boldopen \Bigg}%
-\def\Biglb {\REV@boldopen \Big }%
-\def\bigglb{\REV@boldopen \bigg}%
-\def\biglb {\REV@boldopen \big }%
-\def\Biggrb{\REV@boldclose\Bigg}%
-\def\Bigrb {\REV@boldclose\Big }%
-\def\biggrb{\REV@boldclose\bigg}%
-\def\bigrb {\REV@boldclose\big }%
-\def\REV@pmb#1{%
- \hbox{%
-  \setbox\z@=\hbox{#1}%
-  \kern-.02em\copy\z@\kern-\wd\z@
-  \kern .04em\copy\z@\kern-\wd\z@
-  \kern-.02em
-  \raise.04em\copy\z@
- }%
-}%
-\def\REV@boldopen #1#2{\mathopen {\REV@pmb{$#1#2$}}}%
-\def\REV@boldclose#1#2{\mathclose{\REV@pmb{$#1#2$}}}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\revsymb@inithook}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
-% Package dependencies are taken care of at \cmd\setup@hook\ time.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\revsymb@inithook{%
- \@ifxundefined\dddot{\let\dddot\REV@dddot}{}%
- \@ifxundefined\triangleq{\let\triangleq\REV@triangleq}{}%
- \@ifxundefined\succsim{\let\succsim\altsuccsim}{}%
- \@ifxundefined\precsim{\let\precsim\altprecsim}{}%
- \@ifxundefined\lesssim{\let\lesssim\REV@lesssim}{}%
- \@ifxundefined\gtrsim {\let\gtrsim \REV@gtrsim }{}%
- \@ifxundefined\mathfrak{\let\mathfrak\REV@mathfrak}{}%
- \@ifxundefined\mathbb{\let\mathbb\REV@mathbb}{}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%</revsymb>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \section{The \classoption{10pt} class option: the \texttt{10pt} module}
-% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{10pt} is in this module.}
-% The file \file{aps10pt.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class
-% if \cmd\@pointsize\ has the value 10.
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%<*10pt>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Defend Against Forseeable Errors}%
-% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext
- \def\@tempa{%
-  \endinput
-  \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}%
- }%
- \expandafter\else
-  \def\@tempa{}%
- \expandafter\fi\@tempa
- \class@info{RevTeX pointsize 10pt selected}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\normalsize{%
-   \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xpt{11.5}%
-   \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
-   \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
-   \abovedisplayshortskip  \abovedisplayskip
-   \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip
-   \let\@listi\@listI
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\small{%
-  \@setfontsize\small\@ixpt{10.5}%
-  \abovedisplayskip 8.5\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus4\p@
-  \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
-  \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus2\p@
-  \belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
-  \def\@listi{%
-    \leftmargin\leftmargini
-    \topsep 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
-    \parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
-    \itemsep \parsep
-  }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\footnotesize{%
-  \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@viiipt{9.5pt}%
-  \abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@
-  \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
-  \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus\p@
-  \belowdisplayshortskip 3\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus2\p@
-  \def\@listi{%
-    \leftmargin\leftmargini
-    \topsep 3\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
-    \parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
-    \itemsep \parsep
-  }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\scriptsize{%
- \@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viipt\@viiipt
-}%
-\def\tiny{%
- \@setfontsize\tiny\@vpt\@vipt
-}%
-\def\large{%
- \@setfontsize\large\@xiipt{14pt}%
-}%
-\def\Large{%
- \@setfontsize\Large\@xivpt{18pt}%
-}%
-\def\LARGE{%
- \@setfontsize\LARGE\@xviipt{22pt}%
-}%
-\def\huge{%
- \@setfontsize\huge\@xxpt{25pt}%
-}%
-\def\Huge{%
- \@setfontsize\Huge\@xxvpt{30pt}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The values of these margin parameters are dependent upon 
-% \cmd\twoside@sw; any society or journal that 
-% has its own preferences should override these assignments
-% by doing \cmd\appdef\cmd\setup@hook.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\setup@hook{%
- \twoside@sw{%
-%   \oddsidemargin  -.1in
-%   \evensidemargin -.4in
-    \oddsidemargin  -20pt
-    \evensidemargin -20pt
-    \marginparwidth 107pt
- }{%
-    \oddsidemargin  -.25in
-    \evensidemargin -.25in
-    \marginparwidth 30pt
- }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\marginparsep 6pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\topmargin -61pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\headheight 25pt
-\headsep 16pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\topskip 10pt
-\splittopskip\topskip
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\footskip 30pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
- \textheight = 56pc
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\textwidth42.5pc
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\columnsep 1.5pc
-\columnseprule 0pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\footnotesep 1pt
-\skip\footins 39pt plus 4pt minus 12pt
-\def\footnoterule{%
- \dimen@\skip\footins\divide\dimen@\tw@
- \kern-\dimen@\hrule width.5in\kern\dimen@
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\floatsep 12pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
-\textfloatsep 20pt plus 2pt minus 4pt
-\intextsep 12pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\dblfloatsep 12pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
-\dbltextfloatsep 20pt plus 2pt minus 4pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil
-\@fpsep 8pt plus 2fil
-\@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil
-\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil
-\@dblfpsep 8pt plus 2fil
-\@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\marginparpush 5pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\parskip 0pt plus 1pt
-\parindent 10pt
-\emergencystretch8\p@
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\partopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\leftmargini 25pt
-\leftmarginii 22pt
-\leftmarginiii 18.7pt
-\leftmarginiv 17pt
-\leftmarginv 10pt
-\leftmarginvi 10pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@listI{%
-  \leftmargin\leftmargini
-  \parsep 4\p@ plus2\p@ minus\p@
-  \topsep 8\p@ plus2\p@ minus4\p@
-  \itemsep 4\p@ plus2\p@ minus\p@
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\labelsep 4pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@listii{%
-  \leftmargin\leftmarginii
-  \labelwidth\leftmarginii
-  \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
-  \topsep 4\p@ plus2\p@ minus\p@
-  \parsep 2\p@ plus\p@ minus\p@
-  \itemsep \parsep
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@listiii{%
-  \leftmargin\leftmarginiii
-  \labelwidth\leftmarginiii
-  \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
-  \topsep 2\p@ plus\p@ minus\p@
-  \parsep \z@
-  \partopsep \p@ plus\z@ minus\p@
-  \itemsep \topsep
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@listiv{%
-  \leftmargin\leftmarginiv
-  \labelwidth\leftmarginiv
-  \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@listv{%
-  \leftmargin\leftmarginv
-  \labelwidth\leftmarginv
-  \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@listvi{%
-  \leftmargin\leftmarginvi
-  \labelwidth\leftmarginvi
-  \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%</10pt>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \section{The \classoption{11pt} class option: the \texttt{11pt} module}
-% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{11pt} is in this module.}
-% The file \file{11pt.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class
-% if \cmd\@pointsize\ has the value 11.
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%<*11pt>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Defend Against Forseeable Errors}%
-% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext
- \def\@tempa{%
-  \endinput
-  \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}%
- }%
- \expandafter\else
-  \def\@tempa{}%
- \expandafter\fi\@tempa
- \class@info{RevTeX pointsize 11pt selected}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\normalsize{%
-    \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xipt{13.6}%
-    \abovedisplayskip 11\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus6\p@
-    \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
-    \abovedisplayshortskip  \abovedisplayskip
-    \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip
-    \let\@listi\@listI
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\small{%
-   \@setfontsize\small\@xpt\@xiipt
-   \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
-   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
-   \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@
-   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
-               \topsep 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
-               \parsep 3\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
-               \itemsep \parsep
-   }%
-   \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\footnotesize{%
-   \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@ixpt{11}%
-   \abovedisplayskip 8\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@
-   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus\p@
-   \belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
-   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
-               \topsep 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
-               \parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
-               \itemsep \parsep
-   }%
-   \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\scriptsize{%
-  \@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viiipt{9.5}%
-}%
-\def\tiny{%
-  \@setfontsize\tiny\@vipt\@viipt
-}%
-\def\large{%
-  \@setfontsize\large\@xiipt{14}%
-}%
-\def\Large{%
-  \@setfontsize\Large\@xivpt{18}%
-}%
-\def\LARGE{%
-  \@setfontsize\LARGE\@xviipt{22}%
-}%
-\def\huge{%
-    \@setfontsize\huge\@xxpt{25pt}%
-}%
-\def\Huge{%
-  \@setfontsize\Huge\@xxvpt{30pt}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%</11pt>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \section{The \classoption{12pt} class option: the \texttt{12pt} module}
-% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{12pt} is in this module.}
-% The file \file{12pt.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class
-% if \cmd\@pointsize\ has the value 12.
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%<*12pt>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Defend Against Forseeable Errors}%
-% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext
- \def\@tempa{%
-  \endinput
-  \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}%
- }%
- \expandafter\else
-  \def\@tempa{}%
- \expandafter\fi\@tempa
- \class@info{RevTeX pointsize 12pt selected}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\normalsize{%
-  \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xiipt{14pt}%
-  \abovedisplayskip 12\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus7\p@
-  \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
-  \abovedisplayshortskip  \z@ plus3\p@
-  \belowdisplayshortskip  6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
-  \let\@listi\@listI
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
- \def\small{%
-  \@setfontsize\small\@xipt{14.5pt}%
-  \abovedisplayskip 8\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus6\p@
-  \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
-  \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
-  \belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
-  \def\@listi{%
-    \leftmargin\leftmargini
-    \topsep 9\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus5\p@
-    \parsep 4.5\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
-    \itemsep \parsep
-  }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Same baselineskip as \cmd\small\ ?
-%    \begin{macrocode}
- \def\footnotesize{%
-  \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@xpt{14.5pt}%
-  \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
-  \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
-  \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
-  \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@
-  \def\@listi{%
-    \leftmargin\leftmargini
-    \topsep 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
-    \parsep 3\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
-    \itemsep \parsep
-  }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\scriptsize{%
-  \@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viiipt{9.5pt}%
-}%
-\def\tiny{%
-  \@setfontsize\tiny\@vipt{7pt}%
-}%
-\def\large{%
-  \@setfontsize\large\@xivpt{18pt}%
-}%
-\def\Large{%
-  \@setfontsize\Large\@xviipt{22pt}%
-}%
-\def\LARGE{%
-  \@setfontsize\LARGE\@xxpt{25pt}%
-}%
-\def\huge{%
-    \@setfontsize\huge\@xxvpt{30pt}%
-}%
-\let\Huge=\huge
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%</12pt>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \section{Page parameters}%
-% This code is common to both \classoption{11pt} and \classoption{12pt}.
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%<*11pt|12pt>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\setup@hook{%
- \twoside@sw{%
-  \oddsidemargin   0pt
-  \evensidemargin  0pt
-  \marginparwidth 60pt
- }{%
-  \oddsidemargin 0pt
-  \evensidemargin 0pt
-  \marginparwidth 44pt
- }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\marginparsep 10pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\topmargin -37pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\headheight 12pt
-\headsep 25pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\topskip 10pt
-\splittopskip\topskip
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\footskip 30pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\textheight=665.5\p@
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\setup@hook{%
- \tightenlines@sw{%
-  \def\baselinestretch{1}%
- }{%
-  \def\baselinestretch{1.5}%
- }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\textwidth 468pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\columnsep 10pt
-\columnseprule 0pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\footnotesep 1pt
-\skip\footins 25.25pt plus 4pt minus 12pt
-\def\footnoterule{%
- \dimen@\skip\footins\divide\dimen@\f@ur
- \kern-\dimen@\hrule width.5in\kern\dimen@
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\floatsep        14pt plus 2pt minus 4pt
-\textfloatsep    20pt plus 2pt minus 4pt
-\intextsep       14pt plus 4pt minus 4pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\dblfloatsep     14pt plus 2pt minus 4pt
-\dbltextfloatsep 20pt plus 2pt minus 4pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil
-\@fpsep 10pt plus 2fil
-\@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil
-\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil
-\@dblfpsep 10pt plus 2fil%
-\@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\marginparpush 7pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\parskip 0pt plus 1pt
-\parindent 15pt
-\emergencystretch8\p@
-\partopsep 3pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\leftmargini   30pt
-\leftmarginii  26pt
-\leftmarginiii 22pt
-\leftmarginiv  20pt
-\leftmarginv   12pt
-\leftmarginvi  12pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@listI{\leftmargin\leftmargini \parsep 5\p@ plus2.5\p@ minus\p@
-  \topsep 10\p@ plus4\p@ minus6\p@
-  \itemsep 5\p@ plus2.5\p@ minus\p@
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\labelsep 6pt
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii
-  \labelwidth\leftmarginii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
-  \topsep 5\p@ plus2.5\p@ minus\p@
-  \parsep 2.5\p@ plus\p@ minus\p@
-  \itemsep \parsep
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii
-  \labelwidth\leftmarginiii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
-  \topsep 2.5\p@ plus\p@ minus\p@
-  \parsep \z@ \partopsep \p@ plus\z@ minus\p@
-  \itemsep \topsep
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv
-  \labelwidth\leftmarginiv\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv
-  \labelwidth\leftmarginv\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi
-  \labelwidth\leftmarginvi\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%</11pt|12pt>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \section{The \classoption{aps} class extension: the \texttt{aps} module}
-% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: made aps.rtx part of revtex4.dtx}
-% The file \file{aps.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class
-% if \cmd\@society\ has the value \classoption{aps}.
-%
-% Here, code specific to APS journals is separated out from the \revtex\ document class.
-% (Other societies can customize \revtex\ by supplying their own \file{.rtx} file.)
-%
-% This class extension file is a model for a class extension you might write yourself.
-%
-% First, incorporate a \cmd\ProvidesFile\ command with an optional argument giving
-% the version information, e.g.,
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \ProvidesFile{foo}[2001/09/11 v1.1 Docinfo]%
-% \end{verbatim}
-%
-% Within the society substyle, there are two things we must do as well:
-% define the default journal, 
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-% \def\@journal@default{pra}%
-%    \end{verbatim}
-% And do likewise for the point size:
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-% \def\@pointsize@default{10}%
-%    \end{verbatim}
-%
-% We first define some text entities (amounting to journal abbreviations),
-% then some APS-specific initializations,
-% then code for particular APS journals.
-% In the latter case, the choice is 
-% keyed off the macro \cmd\@journal.
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%<*aps>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Defend Against Forseeable Errors}%
-% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext
- \def\@tempa{%
-  \endinput
-  \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}%
- }%
- \expandafter\else
-  \def\@tempa{}%
- \expandafter\fi\@tempa
- \class@info{RevTeX society APS selected}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Here are the class options relating to the APS:
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{pra}{\change@journal{pra}}%
-\DeclareOption{prb}{\change@journal{prb}}%
-\DeclareOption{prc}{\change@journal{prc}}%
-\DeclareOption{prd}{\change@journal{prd}}%
-\DeclareOption{pre}{\change@journal{pre}}%
-\DeclareOption{prl}{\change@journal{prl}}%
-%\changes{4.2b}{2017/11/21}{(MD) Update options for new titles without "Special Topics" and make prper match style of other journal options}
-\DeclareOption{prab}{\change@journal{prab}}%
-\DeclareOption{prper}{\change@journal{prper}}%
-\DeclareOption{rmp}{\change@journal{rmp}}%
-%\changes{4.2b}{2017/11/21}{(MD) Add options for new APS journals and a generic physrev option for future-proofing}
-\DeclareOption{prx}{\change@journal{prx}}%
-\DeclareOption{prapplied}{\change@journal{prapplied}}%
-\DeclareOption{prmaterials}{\change@journal{prmaterials}}%
-\DeclareOption{prfluids}{\change@journal{prfluids}}%
-\DeclareOption{physrev}{\change@journal{physrev}}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Abbreviations}%
-% \changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 584) Per MD, remove trailing space character from each journal abbreviation: it had caused an extraneous space in the .bbl} 
-% The following macros constitute typing shortcuts for
-% certain journal names.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\adv{AIP Advances}%
-\def\ao{Appl.\ Opt.}%
-\def\ap{Appl.\ Phys.}%
-\def\apl{Appl.\ Phys.\ Lett.}%
-\def\apm{Appl.\ Phys.\ Lett.\ Mater.}%
-\def\apj{Astrophys.\ J.}%
-\def\bell{Bell Syst.\ Tech.\ J.}%
-\def\bmf{Biomicrofluidics}%
-\def\cha{Chaos}%
-\def\jqe{IEEE J.\ Quantum Electron.}%
-\def\assp{IEEE Trans.\ Acoust.\ Speech Signal Process.}%
-\def\aprop{IEEE Trans.\ Antennas Propag.}%
-\def\mtt{IEEE Trans.\ Microwave Theory Tech.}%
-\def\iovs{Invest.\ Ophthalmol.\ Vis.\ Sci.}%
-\def\jcp{J.\ Chem.\ Phys.}%
-\def\jap{J.\ Appl.\ Phys.}%
-\def\jmp{J.\ Math.\ Phys.}%
-\def\jmo{J.\ Mod.\ Opt.}%
-\def\josa{J.\ Opt.\ Soc.\ Am.}%
-\def\josaa{J.\ Opt.\ Soc.\ Am.\ A}%
-\def\josab{J.\ Opt.\ Soc.\ Am.\ B}%
-\def\jpp{J.\ Phys.\ (Paris)}%
-\def\jpr{J.\ Phys.\ Chem.\ Ref.\ Data}%
-\def\ltp{Low.\ Temp.\ Phys.}%
-\def\nat{Nature (London)}%
-\def\oc{Opt.\ Commun.}%
-\def\ol{Opt.\ Lett.}%
-\def\pl{Phys.\ Lett.}%
-\def\pop{Phys.\ Plasmas}%
-\def\pof{Phys.\ Fluids}%
-\def\pra{Phys.\ Rev.\ A}%
-\def\prb{Phys.\ Rev.\ B}%
-\def\prc{Phys.\ Rev.\ C}%
-\def\prd{Phys.\ Rev.\ D}%
-\def\pre{Phys.\ Rev.\ E}%
-\def\prl{Phys.\ Rev.\ Lett.}%
-\def\rmp{Rev.\ Mod.\ Phys.}%
-\def\rsi{Rev.\ Sci.\ Instrum.}%
-\def\rse{J.\ Renewable Sustainable Energy}%
-\def\pspie{Proc.\ Soc.\ Photo-Opt.\ Instrum.\ Eng.}%
-\def\sjqe{Sov.\ J.\ Quantum Electron.}%
-\def\vr{Vision Res.}%
-\def\sd{Structural\ Dynamics}%
-\def\jor{J.\ Rheol.}%
-\def\cp{AIP\ Conference\ Proceedings}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{APS Setup}%
-% Here we define the default procedures for APS journals.
-% Individual APS journals may override these definitions.
-%
-% \subsubsection{Title block}%
-%
-% The specifics of the title block.
-% Apply to all APS journals; individual journals may override these settings.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@fnsymbol}
-% The \LaTeX\ kernel definition of \cmd\@fnsymbol\ is overridden.
-% The definition in \filename{fixltx2e.sty} serves as a guide to the new way to symbol,
-% working in both text- and math modes. 
-%
-% \filename{fixltx2e.sty} duplicates some features of \filename{ltxgrid} and \filename{ltxutil},
-% however, so it may be incompatible with \revtex. 
-% In case it is not loaded, we must provide a meaning for \cmd\TextOrMath,
-% which that package makes robust. 
-% I believe that it is \cmd\@fnsymbol\ itself that ought to be robustified.
-% e\TeX\ further complicates matters; we do not especially accomodate it. 
-%
-% \changes{4.1d}{2009/03/27}{Definition of \cs{	@fnsymbol} follows fixltx2e.sty}
-%
-% Not! \cmd\TextOrMath\ must be made robust in any case (Bug 530). I return things to follow
-% core \LaTeXe\ (\filename{latex.ltx}). 
-% \changes{4.1f}{2009/10/05}{(AO, 530) \cs{@fnsymbol}: Failed to import fixltx2e.sty technology. Return to LaTeX core.}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@fnsymbol#1{%
- \ensuremath{%
-  \ifcase#1\or 
-   *\or
-   \dagger\or
-   \ddagger\or
-   \mathsection\or
-   \mathparagraph\or
-%  \|\or
-   **\or
-   \dagger\dagger\or
-   \ddagger\ddagger\else
-   \mathsection\mathsection\or
-   \mathparagraph\mathparagraph\or
-   ***\or
-   \dagger\dagger\dagger\or
-   \ddagger\ddagger\ddagger\else
-   \mathsection\mathsection\mathsection\or
-   \mathparagraph\mathparagraph\mathparagraph\or
-%
-   \@ctrerr 
-  \fi
- }%
-}%
-\appdef\document@inithook{%
- \@ifxundefined\TextOrMath{%
-  \DeclareRobustCommand\TextOrMath{\@ifmmode{\false@sw}{\true@sw}}%
- }{}%
-}%
-\let\thefootnote@latex\thefootnote
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% We assign the default titlepage style for APS; a journal or document instance 
-% may override by invoking one of the other \cmd\clo@... procedures defined in \revtex.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\clo@groupedaddress
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\titlepage}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\renewenvironment{titlepage}{%
-  \let\wastwocol@sw\twocolumn@sw
-  \onecolumngrid
-  \newpage
-  \thispagestyle{titlepage}%
-  \c@page\z@
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% A comment: ``article.cls sets this to one not zero?''
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-}{%
-  \wastwocol@sw{\twocolumngrid}{\newpage}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractheading}
-% APS Journals all set the abstract head the same way, with no head.
-% However, if the user has specified the \classoption{preprint} class option,
-% then the abstract will have a head.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\frontmatter@abstractheading{%
- \preprintsty@sw{%
-  \begingroup
-   \centering\large
-   \abstractname
-   \par
-  \endgroup
- }{}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractwidth}
-% All APS journals set the abstract to the same width.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\frontmatter@abstractwidth{400\p@}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractfont}
-% All APS journals set the abstract body the same way.
-% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 123) add parskip to the abstract.}
-% \changes{4.1e}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) be nice to a list within the abstract}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\frontmatter@abstractfont{%
- \small
- \parindent1em\relax
- \adjust@abstractwidth
-}%
-\def\adjust@abstractwidth{%
- \dimen@\textwidth\advance\dimen@-\frontmatter@abstractwidth
- \divide\dimen@\tw@
- \galley@sw{%
-  \advance\rightskip\tw@\dimen@
- }{%
-  \advance\leftskip\dimen@
-  \advance\rightskip\dimen@
- }%
- \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%\changes{4.2b}{2017/11/22}{(MD) Change default to not use a title page - it seems antiquated}
-% All APS journal preprints use separate titlepage and full-width abstract.
-% 
-% In effect, we establish a society default value for \cmd\preprintsty@sw,
-% and for \cmd\titlepage@sw.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@booleanfalse\preprintsty@sw
-\@booleanfalse\titlepage@sw
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We choose the page style for all APS journals. 
-% The journal may override by inserting its own code in \cmd\setup@hook. 
-% Users wishing to customize their documents will be able to invoke a \cmd\pagestyle\
-% command anywhere in the preamble; it will override the assignments here. 
-%
-% Here is the big switch for APS preprints. Note that \cmd\preprintsty@sw
-% is also consulted in various procedures, but we assume its value does 
-% not change after \cmd\setup@hook\ time. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\setup@hook{%
-  \preprintsty@sw{%
-   \ps@preprint
-   \def\frontmatter@abstractwidth{\textwidth}%
-   \def\frontmatter@affiliationfont{\it}%
-   \let\section\section@preprintsty
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The following line of code had been commented out at this point.
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-%  \let\@hangfrom@section\@hangfrom@section@preprintsty
-%    \end{verbatim}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-   \let\subsection\subsection@preprintsty
-   \let\subsubsection\subsubsection@preprintsty
-  }{%
-   \ps@article
-  }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@authorformat}
-% All APS journals set the author list the same.
-% The leading is 11.5 points, and
-% there is 11.5 points of extra space above the first author line
-% (which amounts to the same thing as 11.5 points extra below the title)
-% for a total of 23 points base-to-base.
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\frontmatter@authorformat{%
- \skip@\@flushglue
- \@flushglue\z@ plus.3\hsize\relax
- \centering
- \advance\baselineskip\p@
- \parskip11.5\p@\relax
- \@flushglue\skip@
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The following line of code had been commented out at this point.
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-%\preprintsty@sw{}{%
-% \addvspace{0\p@}%
-%}%
-%    \end{verbatim}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@above@affilgroup}
-% The default amount of space above affiliation.
-% APS Journals have 24 points b-b above an affiliation group.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\frontmatter@above@affilgroup{%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The following line of code had been commented out at this point.
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-%\preprintsty@sw{}{%
-% \addvspace{11\p@}%
-%}%
-%    \end{verbatim}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@above@affiliation}
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script}
-% The default amount of space above affiliation.
-% APS Journals have no extra space between author group down to common affiliation.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script{%
- \skip@\@flushglue
- \@flushglue\z@ plus.3\hsize\relax
- \centering
- \@flushglue\skip@
- \addvspace{3.5\p@}%
-}%
-\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation{%
- \preprintsty@sw{}{%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The following line of code had been commented out at this point.
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-% \addvspace{12\p@}%
-%    \end{verbatim}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
- }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@affiliationfont}
-% All APS journals set the affiliation the same.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\frontmatter@affiliationfont{%
- \small\it
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@collaboration@above}
-% PRL: 1.5 points extra: 13 points base-to-base above.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\frontmatter@collaboration@above{%
- \preprintsty@sw{%
- }{%
-  \parskip1.5\p@\relax
- }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@setup}
-% All APS journals set the title page using the same font and size.
-% However, justification varies for the title block elements, so
-% we assert none here.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\frontmatter@setup{%
- \normalfont
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@above}
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@format}
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@below}
-% All APS journals set the article title the same.
-%
-% Note: Spacing from title to author is 23 points base-to-base.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\frontmatter@title@above{\addvspace{6\p@}}%
-\def\frontmatter@title@format{\large\bfseries\centering\parskip\z@skip}%
-\def\frontmatter@title@below{}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@makefnmark}
-% All APS journals share this procedure for setting the titlepage footnote text.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@author@parskip{3\p@}%
-\def\frontmatter@makefnmark{%
- \@textsuperscript{%
-  \normalfont\@thefnmark
- }%
-}%
-\def\frontmatter@authorbelow{%
- \addvspace{3\p@}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@RRAP@format}
-% All APS journals use the same format for the ``Received, Revised, etc.'' block on the title page.
-%
-% Change note: 11.5 points b-b from author/affiliation down to date.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\frontmatter@RRAP@format{%
-  \small
-  \centering
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% The following line of code had been commented out at this point.
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-% \preprintsty@sw{}{\parskip.5ex\relax}%
-%    \end{verbatim}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  \everypar{\hbox\bgroup(\@gobble@leavemode@uppercase}%
-  \def\par{\@ifvmode{}{\unskip)\egroup\@@par}}%
-}%
-\def\punct@RRAP{;\egroup\ \hbox\bgroup}%
-\def\@gobble@leavemode@uppercase#1#2{\expandafter\MakeTextUppercase}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@PACS@format}
-% 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\frontmatter@PACS@format{%
-   \addvspace{11\p@}%
-   \footnotesize
-   \adjust@abstractwidth
-   \parindent\z@
-   \parskip\z@skip
-   \samepage
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@keys@format}
-% 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\frontmatter@keys@format{%
-   \footnotesize
-   \adjust@abstractwidth
-   \parindent\z@
-   \samepage
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ps@titlepage}
-% \changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{multiple preprint commands}
-% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Stack \cs{preprint} args flush right at right margin.}
-% Title page style. Currently empty except for preprint header,
-% which consists of all the \cmd\preprint\ arguments,
-% stacked flush right at the right margin.
-% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Insert procedure \cs{checkindate}}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ps@titlepage{%
-  \def\@oddhead{%
-   \hfill
-   \preprint@sw{%
-    \expandafter\produce@preprints\expandafter{\@preprint}%
-   }{}%
-  }%
-  \let\@evenhead\@oddhead
-  \def\@oddfoot{%
-   \hb@xt@\z@{\byrevtex\hss}%
-   \hfil
-   \preprintsty@sw{\thepage}{}%
-   \quad\checkindate
-   \hfil
-  }%
-  \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot
-}%
-\def\byrevtex{\byrevtex@sw{Typeset by REV\TeX}{}}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\produce@preprints}
-% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 115) If three or more preprints specified, set on single line, with commas.}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\produce@preprints#1{%
- \vtop to \z@{%
-  \def\baselinestretch{1}%
-  \small
-  \let\preprint\preprint@count
-  \count@\z@
-  #1%
-  \@ifnum{\count@>\tw@}{%
-   \hbox{%
-    \let\preprint\preprint@hlist
-    #1%
-    \setbox\z@\lastbox
-   }%
-  }{%
-   \let\preprint\preprint@cr
-   \halign{\hfil##\cr#1\crcr}%
-   \par
-   \vss
-  }%
- }%
-}%
-\def\preprint@cr#1{#1\cr}%
-\def\preprint@count#1{\advance\count@\@ne}%
-\def\preprint@hlist#1{#1\hbox{, }}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Stacked Heads}%
-% All APS journals put a period (.), followed by quad space, after the section number.
-% Also, no hanging section number.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\quad}%
-\def\@hang@from#1#2#3{#1#2#3}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Note that in the following, we wish to set the section head uppercase, so we use
-% David Carlisle's \cmd\MakeTextUppercase. However, because this procedure effectively 
-% parses its argument (looking for things to \emph{not} translate), it has to be invoked
-% in such a way that the argument of the \cmd\section\ command is passed to it as its
-% own argument. 
-%
-% To accomplish this, we use the \cmd\@hangfrom@\ hook, which was developed for this 
-% purpose.
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\section{%
-  \@startsection
-    {section}%
-    {1}%
-    {\z@}%
-    {0.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
-    {0.5cm}%
-    {%
-      \normalfont\small\bfseries
-      \centering
-    }%
-}%
-\def\@hangfrom@section#1#2#3{\@hangfrom{#1#2}\MakeTextUppercase{#3}}%
-\def\@hangfroms@section#1#2{#1\MakeTextUppercase{#2}}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\subsection{%
-  \@startsection
-    {subsection}%
-    {2}%
-    {\z@}%
-    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
-    {.5cm}%
-    {%
-     \normalfont\small\bfseries
-     \centering
-    }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\subsubsection{%
-  \@startsection
-    {subsubsection}%
-    {3}%
-    {\z@}%
-    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
-    {.5cm}%
-    {%
-     \normalfont\small\itshape
-     \centering
-    }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Runin Heads}%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\paragraph{%
-  \@startsection
-    {paragraph}%
-    {4}%
-    {\parindent}%
-    {\z@}%
-    {-1em}%
-    {\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\subparagraph{%
-  \@startsection
-    {subparagraph}%
-    {5}%
-    {\parindent}%
-    {3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
-    {-1em}%
-    {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\section@preprintsty}
-% \begin{macro}{\subsection@preprintsty}
-% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection@preprintsty}
-% Here are the formatting procedures specific to the preprint style;
-% the only difference is that the heads are flush left instead of centered.
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\section@preprintsty{%
-  \@startsection
-    {section}%
-    {1}%
-    {\z@}%
-    {0.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
-    {0.5cm}%
-    {%
-      \normalfont\small\bfseries
-%     \centering
-    }%
-}%
-%\def\@hangfrom@section@preprintsty#1#2#3{\@hangfrom{#1#2}\MakeTextUppercase{#3}}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\subsection@preprintsty{%
-  \@startsection
-    {subsection}%
-    {2}%
-    {\z@}%
-    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
-    {.5cm}%
-    {%
-     \normalfont\small\bfseries
-%    \centering
-    }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\subsubsection@preprintsty{%
-  \@startsection
-    {subsubsection}%
-    {3}%
-    {\z@}%
-    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
-    {.5cm}%
-    {%
-     \normalfont\small\itshape
-%    \centering
-    }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% By default, APS journals set titlepage notes as footnotes.
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-\let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@footnote
-%    \end{verbatim}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Table of Contents}%
-% The toc will itself make an entry in the toc, 
-% but we temporarily turn off toc formatting for the duration.
-% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 461) Change the csname revtex uses from @dotsep to ltxu@dotsep. The former is understood in mu. (What we wanted was a dimension.)}%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em}%
-\def\@tocrmarg {2.55em}%
-\def\@dotsep{2}%
-\def\ltxu@dotsep{4.5pt}%
-\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\tableofcontents{%
- \addtocontents{toc}{\string\tocdepth@munge}%
- \print@toc{toc}%
- \addtocontents{toc}{\string\tocdepth@restore}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\tocdepth@munge{%
-  \let\l@section@saved\l@section
-  \let\l@section\@gobble@tw@
-}%
-\def\@gobble@tw@#1#2{}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\tocdepth@restore{%
-  \let\l@section\l@section@saved
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The following definition of \cmd\l@part\ is a variant on
-% the definition of \cmd\l@@sections\ in \file{ltxutil.dtx}.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\l@part#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}%
- \begingroup
-  \set@tocdim@pagenum\@tempboxa{#2}%
-% \@tempdima 3em %
-  \parindent \z@
-  \rightskip\tocleft@pagenum plus 1fil\relax
-  \skip@\parfillskip\parfillskip\z@
-  \addvspace{2.25em plus\p@}%
-  \large \bf %
-  \leavevmode\ignorespaces#1\unskip\nobreak\hskip\skip@
-  \hb@xt@\rightskip{\hfil\unhbox\@tempboxa}\hskip-\rightskip\hskip\z@skip
-  \par
-  \nobreak %
- \endgroup
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\l@section}
-% Determine which TOC elements are automatically indented.
-%
-% We set the TOC to the standard of RMP. 
-% If APS has its own specification, we will code it, and RMP must override.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\tocleft@{\z@}%
-\def\tocdim@min{5\p@}%
-\def\l@section{%
- \l@@sections{}{section}% Implicit #3#4
-}%
-\def\l@f@section{%
- \addpenalty{\@secpenalty}%
- \addvspace{1.0em plus\p@}%
- %\bf
-}%
-\def\l@subsection{%
- \l@@sections{section}{subsection}% Implicit #3#4
-}%
-\def\l@subsubsection{%
- \l@@sections{subsection}{subsubsection}% Implicit #3#4
-}%
-\def\l@paragraph#1#2{}%
-\def\l@subparagraph#1#2{}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Activate the auto TOC processing.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\let\toc@pre\toc@pre@auto
-\let\toc@post\toc@post@auto
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Default column bottom}%
-% All APS journal styles have flush bottoms.
-%\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 566) restore 4.0 behavior: flush column bottoms}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@booleanfalse\raggedcolumn@sw
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \subsubsection{Table alignment style}%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\tableft@skip@float}
-% \begin{macro}{\tabmid@skip@float}
-% \begin{macro}{\tabright@skip@float}
-% \begin{macro}{\array@row@pre@float}
-% \begin{macro}{\array@row@pst@float}
-% All APS publications have the same table specification:
-% Scotch rules above and below, centered in column.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\tableft@skip@float{\z@ plus\hsize}%
-\def\tabmid@skip@float{\@flushglue}%
-\def\tabright@skip@float{\z@ plus\hsize}%
-\def\array@row@pre@float{\hline\hline\noalign{\vskip\doublerulesep}}%
-\def\array@row@pst@float{\noalign{\vskip\doublerulesep}\hline\hline}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsubsection{Footnote formatting}%
-% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) \cs{@makefntext} and \cs{frontmatter@makefntext} must be defined harmoniously}%
-% We customize the formatting of footnotes for all APS journals.
-% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def\@makefntext#1{%
- \def\baselinestretch{1}%
- \leftskip1em%
- \parindent1em%
- \noindent
- \nobreak\hskip-\leftskip
- \hb@xt@\leftskip{%
-  \hss\@makefnmark\ %
- }%
- #1%
- \par
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@makefntext}
-% We ensure that frontmatter footnotes format similarly to body footnotes. 
-% But we provide our own hypertext anchor, otherwise not provided.
-% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def\frontmatter@makefntext#1{%
- \def\baselinestretch{1}%
- \leftskip1em%
- \parindent1em%
- \noindent
- \nobreak\hskip-\leftskip
- \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{frontmatter.\expandafter\the\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname}\hyper@anchorend}%
- \hb@xt@\leftskip{%
-  \hss\@makefnmark\ %
- }%
- #1%
- \par
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsubsection{Appendix}%
-% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
-% \begin{macro}{\@hangfrom@appendix}
-% \begin{macro}{\@hangfroms@appendix}
-% \begin{macro}{\@appendixcntformat}
-% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 129) section* within appendix was producing appendixname}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\prepdef\appendix{%
- \par
- \let\@hangfrom@section\@hangfrom@appendix
-%\let\@hangfroms@section\@hangfroms@appendix
- \let\@sectioncntformat\@appendixcntformat
-}%
-\def\@hangfrom@appendix#1#2#3{%
- #1%
- \@if@empty{#2}{%
-  #3%
- }{%
-  #2\@if@empty{#3}{}{:\ #3}%
- }%
-}%
-\def\@hangfroms@appendix#1#2{%
- #1#2%
-}%
-\def\@appendixcntformat#1{\appendixname\ \csname the#1\endcsname}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Bibliography}%
-% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/04}{(AO, 576) In .bst files, remove support for the annote field}%
-%
-% Customize \revtex\ for the journal substyle;
-% this task requires three components:
-% the \BibTeX\ \file{apsrev.bst} and \file{apsrmp.bst} style files, and
-% customizations of the \env{thebibliography} environment.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@bibstyle}
-% Define the argument of the \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command
-% (if the document does not do so).
-% The user must have installed a \file{.bst} file of the corresponding name.
-% This file will then be used by \BibTeX\ when compiling the document's \file{.bbl} file.
-%
-%  To generate \file{apsrev.bst}, use \classname{custom-bib} version 4.21 or later.
-%  Run the \file{.bst} generator, \file{makebst.tex}, and
-%  accept all defaults, with the following exceptions:
-%
-% \def\QandA#1#2#3{\item#1: \textbf{#2}: \texttt{#3}---}%
-% \def\CandE#1{\item\relax\texttt{#1}---}%
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \QandA{LANGUAGE FIELD}{l}{lang}Use language field to switch hyphenation patterns for title
-% \QandA{PRESENTATIONS}{b}{pres,pres-bf}Presentation, speaker bold face 
-% \QandA{ORDERING OF REFERENCES}{c}{seq-no}Citation order (unsorted, like unsrt.bst)
-% \QandA{ORDER ON VON PART}{x}{vonx}Sort without von part (de la Maire after Mahone)
-% \QandA{AUTHOR NAMES}{i}{nm-init,ed-au}Initials + surname (J. F. Smith)
-% \QandA{POSITION OF JUNIOR}{*}{jnrlst}Junior comes last as Smith, John, Jr.
-% \QandA{TYPEFACE FOR AUTHORS IN LIST OF REFERENCES}{u}{nmft,nmft-def}User defined author font (\cmd\bibnamefont)
-% \QandA{FONT FOR FIRST NAMES}{u}{fnm-def}First names in user defined font (\cmd\bibfnamefont)
-% \QandA{EDITOR NAMES IN INCOLLECTION ETC}{a}{nmfted}Editors incollection like authors font
-% \QandA{FONT FOR `AND' IN LIST}{r}{nmand-rm}`And' in normal font (JONES and JAMES)
-% \QandA{FONT OF CITATION LABELS IN TEXT}{u}{lab,lab-def}User defined citation font (\cmd\citenamefont)
-% \QandA{FONT FOR `AND' IN CITATIONS}{r}{and-rm}Cited `and' in normal font 
-% \QandA{DATE FORMAT}{*}{yr-par}Date in parentheses as (May 1993)
-% \QandA{DATE EMPTY}{-}{date-nil-x}If date is empty, then do not produce the surrounding punctuation (parens, brackets, colon, comma)
-% \QandA{TITLE OF ARTICLE}{d}{tit-qq}Title and punctuation in double quotes (``Title,'' ..)
-% \QandA{INPROCEEDINGS CHAPTER AND PAGES, LIKE INBOOK}{-}{inproceedings-chapter}produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook
-% \QandA{TITLE PRESENT IN ARTICLE, INCOLLECTION, AND INPROCEEDINGS}{x}{jtit-x}Title is ignored
-% \QandA{INPROCEEDINGS CHAPTER AND PAGES, LIKE INBOOK}{y}{inproceedings-chapter}produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook
-% \QandA{ARTICLE BOOKTITLE PRESENT}{}{article-booktitle}format booktitle 
-% \QandA{ARTICLE SERIES PRESENT}{}{article-series}article can has series
-% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME FONT}{r}{jttl-rm}Journal name normal font
-% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME WITH ADDRESS}{y}{journal-address}Include address field (in parentheses) along with journal name
-% \QandA{BOOK TITLE FIELDS}{y}{book-bt}Field `booktitle', or if absent field `title', is book title 
-% \QandA{THESIS TITLE OPTIONAL}{}{thesis-title-o}Title is optional: no warning issued if empty
-% \QandA{TECHNICAL REPORT TITLE}{b}{trtit-b}Tech. report title like books 
-% \QandA{TECHNICAL REPORT INSTITUTION}{}{techreport-institution-par}format tech report institution like book publisher
-% \QandA{JOURNAL VOLUME}{b}{vol-bf}Volume bold as {\bf vol}(num)
-% \QandA{JOURNAL VOL AND NUMBER}{x}{vnum-x}Journal vol, without number as 34
-% \QandA{VOLUME PUNCTUATION}{c}{volp-com}Volume with comma as vol(num), ppp
-% \QandA{PAGE NUMBERS}{f}{jpg-1}Only start page number 
-% \QandA{BOOK EDITOR W/O AUTHOR}{}{book-editor-booktitle}Book permits empty author, produces title before editor in this case
-% \QandA{INBOOK PERMITS TITLE, BOOKTITLE, AUTHOR, EDITOR}{a}{inbook-editor-booktitle}Allow using both title/booktitle, both author/editor
-% \QandA{CONFERENCE ADDRESS FOR BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, INPROCEEDINGS, PROCEEDINGS}{a}{bookaddress}Italic booktitle followed by bookaddress in roman
-% \QandA{NUMBER AND SERIES FOR BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, INPROCEEDINGS, PROCEEDINGS}{*}{num-xser}Allows number without series and suppresses word "number"
-% \QandA{WORD NUMBER CAPITALIZED FOR NUMBER AND SERIES}{c}{number-cap}Capitalize word `number' as: "Number 123"
-% \QandA{WORD CHAPTER CAPITALIZED}{c}{chapter-cap}Capitalize word `chapter' as: `Chapter 42'
-% \QandA{COMBINING NUMBER AND SERIES}{x}{series-number}Series number as: `Springer Lecture Notes No. 125'
-% \QandA{POSITION OF NUMBER AND SERIES}{b}{numser-booktitle}After book title and conference address, and before editors 
-% \QandA{VOLUME AND SERIES FOR BOOKS/COLLECTIONS}{s}{ser-vol}Series, vol. 23
-% \QandA{VOLUME AND SERIES FORMATTING}{y}{ser-rm}format series roman , even when used with volume
-% \QandA{WORD VOLUME CAPITALIZED FOR VOLUME AND SERIES}{y}{volume-cap}Capitalize word `volume', as: `Volume 7 in Lecture Series'
-% \QandA{POSITION OF VOLUME AND SERIES FOR INCOLLECTION, INBOOK, AND INPROCEEDINGS}{e}{ser-ed}Series and volume after booktitle and before editors
-% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME PUNCTUATION}{x}{jnm-x}Space after journal name
-% \QandA{PAGES IN BOOK}{*}{pg-bk,book-chapter-pages}As chapter and page: chapter 42, page 345
-% \QandA{PUBLISHER IN PARENTHESES}{d}{pub-date}Publisher with address and date in parentheses (Oxford, 1994)
-% \QandA{EMPTY PUBLISHER PARENTHESES}{y}{ay-empty-pub-parens-x}eliminate parentheses altogether if nothing inside
-% \QandA{PUBLISHER POSITION}{}{pre-pub}Publisher before volume, chapter, pages 
-% \QandA{}{}{pre-edn}Edition before publisher
-% \QandA{}{p}{pre-pub,pre-edn}Edition, publisher, volume, chapter, pages
-% \QandA{ISBN NUMBER}{*}{isbn}Include ISBN for books, booklets, etc.
-% \QandA{ISSN NUMBER}{*}{issn}Include ISSN for periodicals
-% \QandA{DOI NUMBER}{a}{doi-link,doi}Doi forms a link to the publication, anchored to the volume or title
-% \QandA{EDITOR IN COLLECTIONS}{b}{edby}In booktitle, edited by ..  (where .. is names)
-% \QandA{PUNCTUATION BETWEEN SECTIONS (BLOCKS)}{c}{blk-com}Comma between blocks 
-% \QandA{FINAL PUNCTUATION}{c}{fin-endbibitem}Command at end instead of period 
-% \QandA{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES'}{a}{pp}`Page' abbreviated as p. or pp.
-% \QandA{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS'}{a}{ed}`Editor' abbreviated as ed. or eds.
-% \QandA{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS}{a}{abr}Abbreviations of such words
-% \QandA{ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION'}{a}{ednx}`Edition' abbreviated as `ed' 
-% \QandA{EDITION NUMBERS}{n}{ord}Numerical editions as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc
-% \QandA{STORED JOURNAL NAMES}{a}{jabr}Abbreviated journal names 
-% \QandA{FONT OF `ET AL'}{i}{etal-it}Italic et al 
-% \QandA{ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS}{r}{revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation}Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, url, translation
-% \QandA{SLACcitation FIELD}{}{SLACcitation}Produce SLACcitation field
-% \QandA{NUMPAGES DATA FIELD}{*}{numpages-x}Do not include numpages field 
-% \QandA{URL ADDRESS}{*}{url,url-prefix-x}URL without prefix (default: `URL ')
-% \QandA{REFERENCE COMPONENT TAGS}{b}{bibinfo}Reference component tags like \cmd\bibinfo in the content of \cmd\bibitem
-% \QandA{ELEMENT TAGS}{b}{bibfield}Element tags like \cmd\bibfield in the content of \cmd\bibitem
-% \QandA{COMPATIBILITY WITH PLAIN TEX}{*}{nfss}Use LaTeX commands which may not work with Plain TeX
-% \end{enumerate}
-%
-% A file \file{apsrev.dbj} file equivalent to the following should result:
-% \begin{verbatim}
-%\input docstrip
-%\preamble
-%----------------------------------------
-%*** REVTeX-compatible Phys Rev 2010-02-12 ***
-%\endpreamble
-%\postamble
-%End of customized bst file
-%\endpostamble
-%\keepsilent
-%\askforoverwritefalse
-%\def\MBopts{\from{merlin.mbs}{%
-%  head,\MBopta}
-%\from{physjour.mbs}{\MBopta}
-%\from{geojour.mbs}{\MBopta}
-%\from{photjour.mbs}{\MBopta}
-%\from{merlin.mbs}{tail,\MBopta}}
-%\def\MBopta{%
-%  ay,%: Author-year with some non-standard interface
-%  nat,%: Natbib for use with natbib v5.3 or later
-%  lang,%: Use language field to switch hyphenation patterns for title
-%  pres,pres-bf,%: Presentation, speaker bold face 
-%  seq-no,%: Citation order (unsorted, only meaningful for numericals)
-%  vonx,%: Sort without von part (de la Maire after Mahone)
-%  nm-init,ed-au,%: Initials + surname (J. F. Smith)
-%  jnrlst,%: Junior comes last as Smith, John, Jr.
-%  nmft,nmft-def,%: User defined author font (\bibnamefont)
-%  fnm-def,%: First names in user defined font (\bibfnamefont)
-%  nmfted,%: Editors incollection like authors font
-%  nmand-rm,%: `And' in normal font (JONES and JAMES)
-%  lab,lab-def,%: User defined citation font (\citenamefont)
-%  and-rm,%: Cited `and' in normal font 
-%  keyxyr,%: Year blank when KEY replaces missing author (for natbib 7.0)
-%  blkyear,%: Missing date left blank 
-%  yr-par,%: Year in parentheses as (1993)
-%  dtrev,%: Date as year month 
-%  date-nil-x,%: If date is empty, then do not produce the surrounding punctuation (parens, brackets, colon, comma)
-%  tit-qq,%: Title and punctuation in double quotes (``Title,'' ..)
-%  inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook
-%  jtit-x,%: Title is ignored
-%  inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter just as in InBook
-%  article-booktitle,%: format booktitle 
-%  article-series,%: article can has series
-%  jttl-rm,%: Journal name normal font
-%  journal-address,%: Include address field (in parentheses) along with journal name
-%  book-bt,%: Field `booktitle', or if absent field `title', is book title 
-%  thesis-title-o,%: Title is optional: no warning issued if empty
-%  trtit-b,%: Tech. report title like books 
-%  techreport-institution-par,%: format tech report institution like book publisher
-%  vol-bf,%: Volume bold as {\bf vol}(num)
-%  vnum-x,%: Journal vol, without number as 34
-%  volp-com,%: Volume with comma as vol(num), ppp
-%  jpg-1,%: Only start page number 
-%  book-editor-booktitle,%: Book permits empty author, produces title before editor in this case
-%  inbook-editor-booktitle,%: Allow using both title/booktitle, both author/editor
-%  bookaddress,%: Italic booktitle followed by bookaddress in roman
-%  num-xser,%: Allows number without series and suppresses word "number"
-%  number-cap,%: Capitalize word `number' as: "Number 123"
-%  chapter-cap,%: Capitalize word `chapter' as: `Chapter 42'
-%  series-number,%: Series number as: `Springer Lecture Notes No. 125'
-%  numser-booktitle,%: After book title and conference address, and before editors 
-%  ser-vol,%: Series, vol. 23
-%  ser-rm,%: format series roman , even when used with volume
-%  volume-cap,%: Capitalize word `volume', as: `Volume 7 in Lecture Series'
-%  ser-ed,%: Series and volume after booktitle and before editors
-%  jnm-x,%: Space after journal name
-%  pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,%: As chapter and page: chapter 42, page 345
-%  pub-date,%: Publisher with address and date in parentheses (Oxford, 1994)
-%  ay-empty-pub-parens-x,%: eliminate parentheses altogether if nothing inside
-%  pre-pub,pre-edn,%: Edition, publisher, volume, chapter, pages
-%  isbn,%: Include ISBN for books, booklets, etc.
-%  issn,%: Include ISSN for periodicals
-%  doi-link,doi,%: Doi forms a link to the publication, anchored to the volume or title
-%  edby,%: In booktitle, edited by ..  (where .. is names)
-%  blk-com,%: Comma between blocks 
-%  fin-endbibitem,%: Command at end instead of period 
-%  pp,%: `Page' abbreviated as p. or pp.
-%  ed,%: `Editor' abbreviated as ed. or eds.
-%  abr,%: Abbreviations of such words
-%  ednx,%: `Edition' abbreviated as `ed' 
-%  ord,%: Numerical editions as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc
-%  jabr,%: Abbreviated journal names 
-%  etal-it,%: Italic et al 
-%  revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,%: Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, url, translation
-%  SLACcitation,%: Produce SLACcitation field
-%  numpages-x,%: Do not include numpages field 
-%  url,url-prefix-x,%: URL without prefix (default: `URL ')
-%  bibinfo,%: Reference component tags like \bibinfo in the content of \bibitem
-%  bibfield,%: Element tags like \bibfield in the content of \bibitem
-%  nfss,%: Use LaTeX commands which may not work with Plain TeX
-%,{%
-%  }}
-%\generate{\file{apsrev4-2.bst}{\MBopts}}
-%\endbatchfile
-% \end{verbatim}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Comparing apsrev.bst and apsrmp.bst}\label{sec:CompRevRmp}
-% These two bibliographic styles differ as follows:
-% \file{apsrev.dbj} has the following guard codes, which \file{apsrmp.dbj} does not:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \CandE{seq-no}%
-%    Citation order (unsorted, like unsrt.bst)
-% \CandE{nm-init,ed-au}%
-%    Initials + surname (J. F. Smith)
-% \CandE{blkyear}%
-%    Missing date left blank 
-% \CandE{date-nil-x}%
-%    If date is empty, then do not produce the surrounding punctuation (parens, brackets, colon, comma)
-% \CandE{inproceedings-chapter}%
-%    produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook
-% \CandE{techreport-institution-par}%
-%    format tech report institution like book publisher
-% \CandE{vnum-x}%
-%    Journal vol, without number as `34'
-% \CandE{pub-date}%
-%    Publisher with address and date in parentheses (Oxford, 1994)
-% \CandE{pre-pub}%
-%    Edition, publisher, volume, chapter, pages. Note that both use guard code pre-edn.
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \file{apsrmp.dbj} has the following guard codes, which \file{apsrev.dbj} does not:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \CandE{nm-rev1}%
-%    Only first name reversed, initials (AGU style: Smith, J. F., H. K. Jones)
-% \CandE{dt-beg}%
-%    Date after authors 
-% \CandE{vnum-sp}%
-%    Journal vol (num) as `34 (2)'
-% \CandE{pp-last}%
-%    Pages at end, but before any notes
-% \CandE{pub-par}%
-%    Publisher in parentheses
-% \CandE{school-par}%
-%    School/address in parens: `(school, address)' 
-% \CandE{bkedcap}%
-%    `Name Editor,' as above, editor upper case
-% \CandE{and-com}%
-%    Comma even with 2 authors as `Tom, and Harry'
-%    
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% We ensure that the journal substyle has the first word
-% in the matter by installing the (default) APS code 
-% later on (see Section~\ref{sec:aps-defaults}).
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\authoryear@sw}
-% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
-% Numerical citations: default value of \cmd\authoryear@sw\ is false.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bibpunct}
-% The following commands effectively establish the style in which \cmd\cite\ commands are
-% formatted.
-% You can think of them as the second needed component for the bibliography.
-% 
-% Set up for APS numerical citations (once the packages are loaded). 
-% The journal substyle can override these choices.
-%
-% Note that, prior to \classname{natbib} version 8.21, changing \cmd\NAT@sort\ at this late hour would not be totally effective;
-% you would have to give \classname{natbib} the relevant options at load time.
-% From version 8.21 on, \cmd\NAT@sort\ and \cmd\NAT@cmprs\ are not bound at all. 
-% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{For natbib versions before 8.21, \cs{NAT@sort} was consulted only as natbib was being read in. Now it is fully dynamic.}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\setup@hook{%
- \bibpunct{[}{]}{,}{n}{}{,}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\pre@bibdata}
-% 
-% Set up to write endnotes to a .bib file; its data will be incorporated into the bibliography.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
- \def\pre@bibdata{\jobname\bibdata@app}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bibsection}
-% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography.
-%
-% \changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\setup@hook{%
- \def\bibsection{%
-  \par
-  \onecolumngrid@push
-  \begingroup
-   \baselineskip26\p@
-   \bib@device{\textwidth}{245.5\p@}%
-  \endgroup
-  \nobreak\@nobreaktrue
-  \addvspace{19\p@}%
-  \par
-  \onecolumngrid@pop
- }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bib@device}
-% \begin{macro}{\bibpreamble}
-% \begin{macro}{\bibsep}
-% \begin{macro}{\newblock}
-% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bib@device#1#2{%
- \hb@xt@\z@{%
-  \hb@xt@#1{%
-   \hfil
-   \phantomsection
-   \addcontentsline {toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}\refname}%
-%  \hyper@anchorstart {\@currentHref }%
-   \hb@xt@#2{%
-    \skip@\z@\@plus-1fil\relax
-                           \leaders\hrule height.25 \p@ depth.25 \p@ \hskip\z@\@plus1fil
-    \hskip\skip@
-    \hskip\z@\@plus0.125fil\leaders\hrule height.375\p@ depth.375\p@ \hskip\z@\@plus0.75fil \hskip\z@\@plus0.125fil
-    \hskip\skip@
-    \hskip\z@\@plus0.25 fil\leaders\hrule height.5  \p@ depth.5  \p@ \hskip\z@\@plus0.5 fil \hskip\z@\@plus0.25 fil
-    \hskip\skip@
-    \hskip\z@\@plus0.375fil\leaders\hrule height.625\p@ depth.625\p@ \hskip\z@\@plus0.25fil \hskip\z@\@plus0.375fil
- %  \hskip\skip@
- %  \hfil
-   }%
-%  \hyper@anchorend
-   \hfil
-  }%
-  \hss
- }%
-}%
-\appdef\setup@hook{%
- \let\bibpreamble\@empty
- \bibsep\z@\relax
- \def\newblock{\ }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bibfont}
-% We define the font switch that applies to the body of the bibliography.
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\setup@hook{%
- \def\bibfont{%
-  \small
-  \@clubpenalty\clubpenalty
- }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsubsection{Index}%
-% FIXME: the following call to \cmd\twocolumn\ appears wrong if we were in two-column grid.
-% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid}
-% \changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\newenvironment{theindex}{%
- \columnseprule \z@
- \columnsep 35\p@
- \c@secnumdepth-\maxdimen
- \onecolumngrid@push
- \section{\indexname}%
- \thispagestyle{plain}%
- \parindent\z@
- \parskip\z@ plus.3\p@\relax
- \let\item\@idxitem
- \onecolumngrid@pop
-}{%
-%\onecolumngrid@pop
-}%
-%
-\def\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@}%
-%
-\def\subitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{20\p@}}%
-%
-\def\subsubitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{30\p@}}%
-%
-\def\indexspace{\par \vskip 10\p@ plus5\p@ minus3\p@\relax}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Journal- and Pointsize-Specific Code}%
-%
-% After this substyle is read in, we will execute the code specific to the selected 
-% journal: execute the society/journal \file{.rtx} file if it exists, or
-% execute the society/journal macro (if the latter is not defined, it will \cmd\relax\ out). 
-% Here we define the default journal.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@journal@default{pra}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Typesize-Specific Code}%
-%
-% After this society file is read in, we will process the \cmd\@pointsize-specific
-% code. Here we define the default.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@pointsize@default{10}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Note: the convention in \revtex\ and its substyles is that 
-% the substyle must not override any explicit class options
-% declared by the document.
-% This means that the various Booleans of Section~\ref{sec:options}
-% may be assigned here only if they are still undefined at this point.
-%
-% For the APS, we supply code specific to journals PRA, PRB, PRC, PRD, PRE, PRL, PRX, PRAPPLIED, PRMATERIALS, PRFLUIDS, PRAB (was PRSTAB), PRPER (was PRSTPER), and RMP.
-% At present, they are identical,
-% with the exception of PRL and RMP.
-% We also introduce a new generic physrev style now that all of the Phys. Rev. journals 
-% are identical
-% In 4.2, we make the inclusion of titles in the bibliography the default
-%
-% For most all of the APS journals, the journal-dependent 
-% code is relatively meager and is therefore embedded in this file.
-% However, the RMP code is sufficiently extensive that 
-% splitting it out into a separate file is more convenient.
-%
-% \subsubsection{\classoption{pra}}%
-% There is no code specific to \classoption{pra}.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\rtx@apspra{%
- \class@info{APS journal PRA selected}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{\classoption{prb}}%
-% There is no code specific to \classoption{prb}.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\rtx@apsprb{%
- \class@info{APS journal PRB selected}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{\classoption{prc}}%
-% There is no code specific to \classoption{prc}. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\rtx@apsprc{%
- \class@info{APS journal PRC selected}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{\classoption{prd}}%
-% There is no code specific to \classoption{prd}. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\rtx@apsprd{%
- \class@info{APS journal PRD selected}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{\classoption{pre}}%
-% There is no code specific to \classoption{pre}. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\rtx@apspre{%
- \class@info{APS journal PRE selected}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{\classoption{prl}}%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\rtx@apsprl{%
- \class@info{APS journal PRL selected}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% In PRL, the default is the \classoption{bibnotes} option,
-% and the Acknowledgments section has no head.
-%
-% The References head is a device that may be described as a lozenge centered on the baseline,
-% 71 points wide by 2 points thick, with the ends tapering to a half point in thickness.
-% Space above 26 points base to base, below 31 base to base.
-%FIXME: this code may confound \classname{geometry}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
- \let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@endnote
- \@booleanfalse\acknowledgments@sw
- \appdef\setup@hook{%
-  \def\bibsection{%
-   \par
-   \begingroup
-    \baselineskip26\p@
-    \bib@device{\hsize}{72\p@}%
-   \endgroup
-   \nobreak\@nobreaktrue
-   \addvspace{19\p@}%
-  }%
- }%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Implement length checking.
-% Use the \classname{times} and \classname{mathtime} packages,
-% plus whatever other processing is required
-% to make the formatted output be true
-% to the metrics of the journal.
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\setup@hook{%
-  \lengthcheck@sw{%
-   \RequirePackage{times}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Wait. Do not use mathtime after all. APS has their own way of doing math pi, involving
-% Adobe Mathematical Pi and other fonts.
-%    \begin{verbatim}
-%  \RequirePackage{mathtime}%
-%    \end{verbatim}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  }{}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% A PRL does not have numbered sections.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
- \c@secnumdepth=-\maxdimen
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Note: we defer this code until after type size file is read in.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
- \appdef\setup@hook{%
-  \@ifnum{\@pointsize=10\relax}{%
-   \lengthcheck@sw{%
-    \def\large{%
-     \@setfontsize\large{12.5}{14\p@}%
-    }%
-    \def\normalsize{%
-     \@setfontsize\normalsize{10.5}\@xiipt
-     \abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus6\p@ \@minus5\p@
-     \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
-     \abovedisplayshortskip  \abovedisplayskip
-     \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip
-     \let\@listi\@listI
-    }%
-    \def\small{%
-     \@setfontsize\small{9.5}\@xipt
-     \abovedisplayskip 5\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus4\p@
-     \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
-     \abovedisplayshortskip  \abovedisplayskip
-     \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip
-     \let\@listi\@listI
-    }%
-    \DeclareMathSizes{12.5}{12.5}{9}{6}%
-    \DeclareMathSizes{10.5}{10.5}{7.5}{5}%
-    \DeclareMathSizes{9.5}{9.5}{7.0}{5}%
-   }{%
-    \def\normalsize{%
-     \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xpt\@xiipt
-     \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
-     \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
-     \abovedisplayshortskip  \abovedisplayskip
-     \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip
-     \let\@listi\@listI
-    }%
-   }%
-  }{}%
- }%
- \textheight = 694.0\p@
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% End of \classoption{prl} code.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{\classoption{prper}}%
-% There is no code specific to \classoption{prper}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\rtx@apsprper{%
- \class@info{APS journal PRPER selected}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{\classoption{prab}}%
-% There is no code specific to \classoption{prab}. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\rtx@apsprab{%
- \class@info{APS journal PRAB selected}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{\classoption{prx}}%
-% There is no code specific to \classoption{prx}. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\rtx@apsprx{%
- \class@info{APS journal PRX selected}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{\classoption{prapplied}}%
-% There is no code specific to \classoption{prapplied}. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\rtx@apsprapplied{%
- \class@info{APS journal PRApplied selected}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{\classoption{prmaterials}}%
-% There is no code specific to \classoption{prmaterials}. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\rtx@apsprmaterials{%
- \class@info{APS journal PRMaterials selected}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{\classoption{prfluids}}%
-%  PRFluids uses a one-column format for journal format, but if authors want this, they should use the onecolumn option and not the reprint option.
-% Parsing of documentclass options is rather involved and hard to control precisely enough to have the correct behavior using the reprint option.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\rtx@apsprfluids{%
- \class@info{APS journal PRFluids selected}%
- \@booleanfalse\titlepage@sw
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{\classoption{physrev}}%
-% There is no code specific to \classoption{physrev}. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\rtx@apsphysrev{%
- \class@info{APS unified Physical Review journal style selected}%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{\classoption{rmp}}%
-% If this option has been selected, we will read in the needed code from the file \file{apsrmp.rtx}. 
-%
-% \subsection{Establish APS Defaults}\label{sec:aps-defaults}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\footinbib@sw}
-% All APS journals except RMP effectively invoke the \classoption{footinbib} option.
-% We rely on the RMP-specific code to override this assignment. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@booleantrue\footinbib@sw
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@init}
-% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@aps}
-% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}%
-% Procedure \cmd\@bibdataout@aps\ has the job of writing the control record into the
-% job's \cmd\jobname\filename{.bib} file, where it will adjust the options to \filename{.bst} processing. 
-% It is installed into the initialization procedure \cmd\@bibdataout@init, and its meaning 
-% is set by the society (APS) and journal. 
-% For all but RMP, we select the Physical Review style.
-% For the latter case, we change the meaning, per the code in \file{apsrmp.rtx}.
-% 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\@bibdataout@rev{\@bibdataout@aps}%
-\def\@bibdataout@aps{%
- \immediate\write\@bibdataout{%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% An entry that controls processing of the \filename{.bst} file has entry type \texttt{@CONTROL}. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  @CONTROL{%
-   apsrev42Control%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Say whether we want long bibliography style (the default), or the abbreviated style.
-% \changes{4.2b}{2017/11/22}{(MD) MD - not sure why these parameters were different previously. Made them match except for title.}%
-% Use binary flags on control.* flags in bst file to set appropriate parameters
-% author = 08 corresponds to initials, jrnlst
-% editor = 1 corresponds to format identical to authors
-% title = 0  means to include title in journal references if present; title ="" means omit the title even if present (this should be the only difference between long and short bib styles)
-% year = 1 corresponds to truncate
-% page = 0 corresponds to using single page number rather than a range
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-   \longbibliography@sw{%
-    ,author="08",editor="1",pages="0",title="0",year="1"% 
-   }{%
-    ,author="08",editor="1",pages="0",title="",year="1"%
-   }%
-  }%
- }%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Place a \cmd\citation\ into the auxiliary file corresponding to this entry. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
- \if@filesw
-  \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{apsrev42Control}}%
- \fi
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\place@bibnumber}
-% \begin{macro}{\@bibstyle}
-% We install code that will select the presentation for \cmd\bibitem s
-% and govern the \BibTeX\ processing.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\let\place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber@inl
-\def\@bibstyle{apsrev\substyle@post}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{verbatim}
-%\appdef\setup@hook{%
-% \longbibliography@sw{%
-% \appdef\@bibstyle{long}%
-% }{}%
-%}%
-% \end{verbatim}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{APS Sanity Checking}\label{sec:aps-sanity}
-% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/20}{(AO, 524) Makes no sense if citations are superscript numbers and so are footnotes}
-%
-% Rule: if \cmd\place@bibnumber\ is \cmd\place@bibnumber@sup\ 
-% (citations are numbered and set superscript),
-% then it makes no sense for \cmd\footinbib@sw\ to be \cmd\false@sw\ 
-% (footnotes set in the bibliography, as endnotes). 
-% If both conditions prevailed, then the document would have footnotes
-% and citations both as superscript arabic numbers, but independently numbered, 
-% which would be confusing. 
-%
-% Any society that provides for both superscript numbered citations as well as for 
-% numbered footnotes should check for this same condition, and deal with it. 
-%
-% Note: an alternative would be for footnotes to use the same sequence of footnote devices
-% that are used by the frontmatter footnotes 
-% (\cmd\frontmatter@thefootnote\ instead of arabic numbers). 
-%
-% In this case, we would want to refrain from resetting \cmd\c@footnote\ at the end of 
-% the title page formatting.
-% We would also want to treat body footnotes identically to frontmatter footnotes: 
-% the assignments in \cmd\titleblock@produce\ would persist throughout the document.
-%
-% But APS do not choose to go that route. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\setup@hook{%
- \@ifx{\place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber@sup}{%
-  \footinbib@sw{}{%
-   \class@warn{Citations are superscript numbers: footnotes must be endnotes; changing to that configuration}%
-   \@booleantrue\footinbib@sw
-  }%
- }{}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% 
-% Here ends the substyle for society APS.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%</aps>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \section{The \classoption{rmp} journal substyle: the \texttt{rmp} module}
-%
-% The file \file{apsrmp.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class
-% if \cmd\@society\ has the value \classoption{aps}
-% and \cmd\@journal\ has the value \classoption{rmp}.
-%
-% It is read at the end of the \file{aps.rtx}, so all definitions
-% and assignments in that file are operative unless overridden here.
-%
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%<*rmp>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext
- \def\@tempa{%
-  \endinput
-  \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}%
- }%
- \expandafter\else
-  \def\@tempa{}%
- \expandafter\fi\@tempa
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Protect this file from being read in as a society instead of a journal.
-% In such a case, \cmd\@journal\ will be undefined. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifxundefined\@journal{%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% One alternative: abort the document.
-% Another alternative: try to recover: force load the aps society file
-%    \begin{macrocode}
- \class@warn{Please specify the REVTeX options [aps,rmp]!}%
- \@@end
-}{}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Log the journal substyle.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
- \class@info{APS journal RMP selected}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Frontmatter}%
-%
-% We assign the titlepage style for RMP; a document instance 
-% may override by invoking one of the class options of \revtex.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\clo@groupedaddress
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@setup}
-% 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\frontmatter@setup{%
- \normalfont\sffamily\raggedright
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\PACS@warn}
-% Per Mark Doyle, RMP  never displays the PACS, so they don't want the `use showpacs' warning spit out.
-%\changes{4.2b}{2017/11/22}{(MD) PACS are obsolete altogether now}%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\PACS@warn{RMP documents do not display PACS and PACS are obsolete. Your \string\pacs\space will be ignored}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@above}
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@format}
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@below}
-% 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\frontmatter@title@above{}%
-\def\frontmatter@title@format{\Large\bfseries\raggedright}% HelveticaNeue-Medium(Italic) 14pt.
-\def\frontmatter@title@below{\addvspace{12\p@}}% 24pt b-b down to first author
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@authorformat}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Rag the right even more: .8\cs{hsize}. Also, assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}.}%
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).}
-% Set the rag to a milder value, because we want to do true ragged right
-% typesetting, as opposed to the \LaTeX\ default, which gives very poor results.
-%
-% Note: author font is 9.8bp. 19.2bp/14.3bp above/below.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\frontmatter@authorformat{%
- \preprintsty@sw{\vskip0.5pc\relax}{}%
- \@tempskipa\@flushglue
- \@flushglue\z@ plus.8\hsize
- \raggedright\advance\leftskip.5in\relax
- \@flushglue\@tempskipa
- \parskip\z@skip
- \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@affiliationfont}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{As with author formatting, rag the right more, and assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}. Also neutralize \cs{def@after@address}.}%
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).}
-% The hook \cmd\frontmatter@affiliationfont\ controls the formatting of affiliations and affiliation groups.
-% The hook \cmd\frontmatter@above@affilgroup\ is invoked just before proceeding with author/affiliation processing.
-% The \cmd\frontmatter@above@affiliation\ is the amount of space above affiliations in the \classoption{groupedaddress} style,
-% and \cmd\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script\ is that for \classoption{superscriptaddress}.
-%
-% Note: affiliation font is 9.03/10.4bp, 14.3bp/19.2bp b-b above/below
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\frontmatter@affiliationfont{% Helvetica 9/10.2
- \small\slshape\selectfont\baselineskip10.5\p@\relax
- \@tempskipa\@flushglue
- \@flushglue\z@ plus.8\hsize
- \raggedright\advance\leftskip.5in\relax
- \@flushglue\@tempskipa
- \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
- \let\def@after@address\def@after@address@empty
-}%
-\def\frontmatter@above@affilgroup{\addvspace{7.2\p@}}% additional leading above an author
-\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation{\addvspace{5.3\p@}}%
-\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script{}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Set up the default RMP style for title block authors and affiliations.
-% We assign the titlepage style for RMP; a document instance 
-% may override by invoking one of the class options of \revtex.
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{The \texttt{rmp} journal substyle selects \texttt{groupedaddress} by default.}%
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
-%
-% This command should override the effect of the 
-% corresponding command in the society substyle,
-% and any document class option bearing on same will in turn override. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\clo@groupedaddress
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@RRAP@format}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).}
-% Note: in RMP, if we are not in preprint mode, the date will not be produced.
-%
-% Note: Helvetica C/lc, 8.98bp, space above: 16.3bp b-b.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\frontmatter@RRAP@format{%
-  \addvspace{7.3\p@}%
-  \small
-  \raggedright\advance\leftskip.5in\relax
- \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
-}%
-\def\produce@RRAP#1{%
-  \@if@empty{#1}{}{%
-   \@ifvmode{\leavevmode}{}%
-   \unskip(\ignorespaces#1\unskip)\quad
-  }%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractheading}
-% Space above 21.8bp b-b.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\frontmatter@abstractheading{%
- \preprintsty@sw{%
-  \begingroup
-   \centering\large
-   \abstractname
-   \par
-  \endgroup
-  \vspace{.5pc}%
- }{}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractfont}
-% TimesTen 8.93bp/9.6bp X 360bp, indented 36bp, with 21.9/37.6bp b-b above/below
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\frontmatter@abstractfont{%
- \footnotesize
- \hsize360\p@
- \leftskip=0.5in
- \parindent\z@
- \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@preabstractspace}
-% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@postabstractspace}
-% Space above and space below abstract in title block.
-% Should be 22/36 points base-to-base.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\frontmatter@preabstractspace{7.7\p@}%
-\def\frontmatter@postabstractspace{24.6\p@}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% FIXME: Not done: PACS.
-% FIXME: TOC: Head is same as \section: HelveticaNeue 8.98. 32/22bp b-b above/below,
-%             Body: TimesTen 8/10.5.
-%
-% \subsection{General Text}%
-%
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
-% If not in preprint mode, RMP sets the type size to 10/12 point. Note: s/b 11.6bp leading
-%FIXME: define \cmd\normalsize\ only if nobody else has done so. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
- \appdef\setup@hook{%
-  \preprintsty@sw{}{%
-   \def\normalsize{%
-    \@setsize\normalsize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt
-    \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ plus2\p@ minus5\p@
-    \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
-    \abovedisplayshortskip  \abovedisplayskip
-    \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip
-    \let\@listi\@listI
-   }%
-  }%
- }%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Footnote mods:
-% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
- \footnotesep 9.25pt
- \skip\footins 36pt plus 4pt minus 12pt
- \def\footnoterule{%
-  \dimen@\skip\footins\divide\dimen@\thr@@
-  \kern-\dimen@\hrule width.5in\kern\dimen@
- }%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Sectioning}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Use \cs{setup@hook} to initialize all.}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/01}{Section numbering via procedures \cs{secnums@rtx} and \cs{secnums@arabic}.}
-%
-% We override the meaning of \cmd\secnums@rtx. 
-% The class option \classoption{secnumarabic} will continue to work.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\secnums@rtx{%
- \@ifxundefined\thepart{%
-  \def\thepart{\Roman{part}}%
- }{}%
- \@ifxundefined\thesection{%
-  \def\thesection       {\Roman{section}}%
-  \def\p@section        {}%
- }{}%
- \@ifxundefined\thesubsection{%
-  \def\thesubsection    {\Alph{subsection}}%
-  \def\p@subsection     {\thesection.}%
- }{}%
- \@ifxundefined\thesubsubsection{%
-  \def\thesubsubsection {\arabic{subsubsection}}%
-  \def\p@subsubsection  {\thesection.\thesubsection.}%
- }{}%
- \@ifxundefined\theparagraph{%
-  \def\theparagraph     {\alph{paragraph}}%
-  \def\p@paragraph      {\thesection.\thesubsection.\thesubsubsection.}%
- }{}%
- \@ifxundefined\thesubparagraph{%
-  \def\thesubparagraph  {\arabic{subparagraph}}%
-  \def\p@subparagraph   {\thesection.\thesubsection.\thesubsubsection.\theparagraph.}%
- }{}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% In RMP, put a period (.), followed by `nut space', after the section number.
-% Also, hang the section number (the \LaTeX\ default).
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\hskip0.5em\relax}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Note that we wish to set the section head uppercase, so we use
-% David Carlisle's \cmd\MakeTextUppercase. However, because this procedure effectively 
-% parses its argument (looking for things to \emph{not} translate), it has to be invoked
-% in such a way that the argument of the \cmd\section\ command is passed to it as its
-% own argument. 
-%
-% To accomplish this, we use the \cmd\@hangfrom@\ hook, which was developed for this 
-% purpose.
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Add \cs{@hangfroms@section}}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
- \def\section{%
-  \@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{0.8cm plus1ex minus.2ex}{0.4cm}%
-  {%
-   \small\sffamily\bfseries\selectfont
-   \raggedright
-   \parindent\z@
-  }%
- }%
- \def\@hangfrom@section#1#2#3{\@hangfrom{#1#2}\MakeTextUppercase{#3}}%
- \def\@hangfroms@section#1#2{#1\MakeTextUppercase{#2}}%
- \def\subsection{%
-  \@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{0.8cm plus1ex minus.2ex}{0.4cm}%
-  {%
-   \small\sffamily\bfseries
-   \raggedright
-   \parindent\z@
-  }%
- }%
- \def\subsubsection{%
-  \@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{.8cm plus1ex minus.2ex}{0.4cm}%
-  {%
-   \small\sffamily\selectfont
-   \raggedright
-   \parindent\z@
-  }%
- }%
- \def\paragraph{%
-  \@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}{.8cm plus1ex minus.2ex}{-1em}%
-  {%
-   \small\slshape\selectfont
-   \raggedright
-   \parindent\z@
-  }%
- }%
- \def\subparagraph{%
-  \@startsection{subparagraph}{4}{\parindent}{3.25ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-1em}%
-  {\normalsize\bfseries\selectfont}%
- }%
-%
- \setcounter{tocdepth}{4}% FIXME: has no effect
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
-% \begin{macro}{\@hangfrom@appendix}
-% \begin{macro}{\@hangfroms@appendix}
-% \begin{macro}{\@appendixcntformat}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Add \cs{@hangfroms@section}}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\appendix{%
- \let\@hangfrom@section\@hangfrom@appendix
- \let\@sectioncntformat\@appendixcntformat
-}%
-\def\@hangfrom@appendix#1#2#3{%
- #1%
- \@if@empty{#2}{%
-  #3%
- }{%
-  #2\@if@empty{#3}{}{:\ #3}%
- }%
-}%
-\def\@hangfroms@appendix#1#2{%
- #1\appendixname\@if@empty{#2}{}{:\ #2}%
-}%
-\def\@appendixcntformat#1{\appendixname\ \csname the#1\endcsname}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Figure and Table Caption Formatting}
-% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption}
-% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Break out \cs{@caption@fignum@sep}}
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\setlength\belowcaptionskip{2\p@}
-\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
-  \vskip\abovecaptionskip
-  \vbox{%
-   \flushing
-   \small\rmfamily
-   \noindent
-   #1\@caption@fignum@sep#2\par
-  }%
-  \vskip\belowcaptionskip
-}%
-\def\@caption@fignum@sep{\nobreak\hskip.5em plus.2em\ignorespaces}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Citations and Bibliography}%
-%
-% Customize \revtex\ for the journal substyle;
-% this task requires three components:
-% a \BibTeX\ \file{.bst} style file,
-% customizing code for \file{natbib}, and
-% customizations of the \env{thebibliography} environment.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@bibstyle}
-% Define the argument of the \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command
-% (if the document does not do so).
-%
-% The user must have installed a \file{.bst} file of the corresponding name.
-% This file will then be used by \BibTeX\ when compiling the document's \file{.bbl} file.
-%
-%  To generate \file{apsrmp.bst}, use \classname{custom-bib} version 3.89d1 or later.
-%  Run the \file{.bst} generator, \file{makebst.tex}, with the following options:
-%
-% \def\QandA#1#2#3{\item#1: \textbf{#2}: \texttt{#3}---}%
-% \def\CandE#1{\item\relax\texttt{#1}---}%
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \QandA{STYLE OF CITATIONS}{a}{ay}Author-year with some non-standard interface
-% \QandA{AUTHOR}{*}{nat}Natbib for use with natbib v5.3 or later
-% \QandA{LANGUAGE FIELD}{l}{lang}Use language field to switch hyphenation patterns for title
-% \QandA{PRESENTATIONS}{b}{pres,pres-bf}Presentation, speaker bold face 
-% \QandA{ORDER ON VON PART }{x}{vonx}Sort without von part (de la Maire after Mahone)
-% \QandA{AUTHOR NAMES}{a}{nm-rev1}Only first name reversed, initials (AGU style: Smith, J. F., H. K. Jones)
-% \QandA{POSITION OF JUNIOR }{*}{jnrlst}Junior comes last as Smith, John, Jr.
-% \QandA{TYPEFACE FOR AUTHORS IN LIST OF REFERENCES}{u}{nmft,nmft-def}User defined author font (\cmd\bibnamefont)
-% \QandA{FONT FOR FIRST NAMES }{u}{fnm-def}First names in user defined font (\cmd\bibfnamefont)
-% \QandA{EDITOR NAMES IN INCOLLECTION ETC}{a}{nmfted}Editors incollection like authors font
-% \QandA{FONT FOR `AND' IN LIST}{r}{nmand-rm}`And' in normal font (JONES and JAMES)
-% \QandA{FONT OF CITATION LABELS IN TEXT }{u}{lab,lab-def}User defined citation font (\cmd\citenamefont)
-% \QandA{FONT FOR `AND' IN CITATIONS }{r}{and-rm}Cited `and' in normal font 
-% \QandA{LABEL WHEN AUTHORS MISSING }{*}{keyxyr}Year blank when KEY replaces missing author (for natbib 7.0)
-% \QandA{DATE POSITION}{b}{dt-beg}Date after authors 
-% \QandA{DATE FORMAT }{m}{yr-com}Date preceded by comma as `, 1993'
-% \QandA{INCLUDE MONTHS}{m}{aymth}Include month in date 
-% \QandA{REVERSED DATE }{r}{dtrev}Date as year month 
-% \QandA{TRUNCATE YEAR }{*}{note-yr}Year text full as 1990--1993 or `in press'
-% \QandA{TITLE OF ARTICLE}{d}{tit-qq}Title and punctuation in double quotes (``Title,'' ..)
-% \QandA{TITLE PRESENT IN ARTICLE, INCOLLECTION, AND INPROCEEDINGS}{x}{jtit-x}Title is ignored
-% \QandA{INPROCEEDINGS CHAPTER AND PAGES, LIKE INBOOK}{y}{inproceedings-chapter}produce pages after chapter just as in InBook
-% \QandA{ARTICLE BOOKTITLE PRESENT}{?}{article-booktitle}format booktitle 
-% \QandA{ARTICLE SERIES PRESENT}{?}{article-series}article can has series
-% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME FONT}{r}{jttl-rm}Journal name normal font
-% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME WITH ADDRESS}{y}{journal-address}Include address field (in parentheses) along with journal name
-% \QandA{BOOK TITLE FIELDS}{y}{book-bt}Field `booktitle', or if absent field `title', is book title 
-% \QandA{THESIS TITLE OPTIONAL}{?}{thesis-title-o}Title is optional: no warning issued if empty
-% \QandA{TECHNICAL REPORT TITLE}{b}{trtit-b}Tech. report title like books 
-% \QandA{JOURNAL VOLUME}{b}{vol-bf}Volume bold as {\bf vol}(num)
-% \QandA{JOURNAL VOL AND NUMBER}{s}{vnum-sp}Journal vol (num) as 34 (2)
-% \QandA{VOLUME PUNCTUATION}{c}{volp-com}Volume with comma as vol(num), ppp
-% \QandA{PAGE NUMBERS}{f}{jpg-1}Only start page number 
-% \QandA{POSITION OF PAGES}{e}{pp-last}Pages at end but before any notes
-% \QandA{BOOK EDITOR W/O AUTHOR}{}{book-editor-booktitle}Book permits empty author, produces title before editor in this case
-% \QandA{INBOOK PERMITS TITLE, BOOKTITLE, AUTHOR, EDITOR}{a}{inbook-editor-booktitle}Allow using both title/booktitle, both author/editor
-% \QandA{CONFERENCE ADDRESS FOR BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, INPROCEEDINGS, PROCEEDINGS}{a}{bookaddress}Italic booktitle followed by bookaddress in roman
-% \QandA{NUMBER AND SERIES FOR BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, INPROCEEDINGS, PROCEEDINGS}{*}{num-xser}Allows number without series and suppresses word "number"
-% \QandA{WORD NUMBER CAPITALIZED FOR NUMBER AND SERIES}{c}{number-cap}Capitalize word `number' as: "Number 123"
-% \QandA{WORD CHAPTER CAPITALIZED}{c}{chapter-cap}Capitalize word `chapter' as: `Chapter 42'
-% \QandA{COMBINING NUMBER AND SERIES}{x}{series-number}Series number as: `Springer Lecture Notes No. 125'
-% \QandA{POSITION OF NUMBER AND SERIES}{b}{numser-booktitle}After book title and conference address, and before editors 
-% \QandA{VOLUME AND SERIES FOR BOOKS}{s}{ser-vol}Series, vol. 23
-% \QandA{VOLUME AND SERIES FORMATTING}{y}{ser-rm}format series roman , even when used with volume
-% \QandA{WORD VOLUME CAPITALIZED FOR VOLUME AND SERIES}{y}{volume-cap}Capitalize word `volume', as: `Volume 7 in Lecture Series'
-% \QandA{POSITION OF VOLUME AND SERIES FOR INCOLLECTION, INBOOK, AND INPROCEEDINGS}{e}{ser-ed}Series and volume after booktitle and before editors
-% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME PUNCTUATION}{x}{jnm-x}Space after journal name
-% \QandA{PAGES IN BOOK}{*}{pg-bk,book-chapter-pages}As chapter and page: chapter 42, page 345
-% \QandA{PUBLISHER IN PARENTHESES}{p}{pub-par}Publisher in parentheses 
-% \QandA{EMPTY PUBLISHER PARENTHESES}{y}{ay-empty-pub-parens-x}eliminate parentheses altogether if nothing inside
-% \QandA{PUBLISHER POSITION}{e}{pre-edn}Edition before publisher
-% \QandA{SCHOOL}{p}{school-par}school/address in parens: `(school, address)' 
-% \QandA{ISBN NUMBER}{*}{isbn}Include ISBN for books, booklets, etc.
-% \QandA{ISSN NUMBER}{*}{issn}Include ISSN for periodicals
-% \QandA{DOI NUMBER}{a}{doi-link,doi}Doi forms a link to the publication, anchored to the volume or title
-% \QandA{`EDITOR' AFTER NAMES}{a}{bkedcap}`Name Editor,' as above, editor upper case
-% \QandA{EDITOR IN COLLECTIONS}{b}{edby}In booktitle, edited by ..  (where .. is names)
-% \QandA{PUNCTUATION BETWEEN SECTIONS }{c}{blk-com}Comma between blocks 
-% \QandA{FINAL PUNCTUATION}{c}{fin-endbibitem}Command at end instead of period 
-% \QandA{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES' }{a}{pp}`Page' abbreviated as p. or pp.
-% \QandA{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS'}{a}{ed}`Editor' abbreviated as ed. or eds.
-% \QandA{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS}{a}{abr}Abbreviations of such words
-% \QandA{ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION' }{a}{ednx}`Edition' abbreviated as `ed' 
-% \QandA{EDITION NUMBERS}{n}{ord}Numerical editions as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc
-% \QandA{STORED JOURNAL NAMES}{a}{jabr}Abbreviated journal names 
-% \QandA{COMMA BEFORE `AND'}{c}{and-com}Comma even with 2 authors as `Tom, and Harry'
-% \QandA{FONT OF `ET AL'}{i}{etal-it}Italic et al 
-% \QandA{ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS}{r}{revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation}Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, url, translation
-% \QandA{SLACcitation FIELD}{?}{SLACcitation}Produce SLACcitation field
-% \QandA{NUMPAGES DATA FIELD}{*}{numpages-x}Do not include numpages field 
-% \QandA{REFERENCE COMPONENT TAGS}{b}{bibinfo}Reference component tags like \cmd\bibinfo\ in the content of \cmd\bibitem
-% \QandA{ELEMENT TAGS}{b}{bibfield}Element tags like \cmd\bibfield\ in the content of \cmd\bibitem
-% \QandA{COMPATIBILITY WITH PLAIN TEX}{*}{nfss}Use LaTeX commands which may not work with Plain TeX
-% \end{enumerate}
-%
-% A file \file{apsrmp.dbj} file equivalent to the following should result:
-% \begin{verbatim}
-%\input docstrip
-%\preamble
-%----------------------------------------
-%*** REVTeX-compatible RMP 2010-02-12 ***
-%\endpreamble
-%\postamble
-%End of customized bst file
-%\endpostamble
-%\keepsilent
-%\askforoverwritefalse
-%\def\MBopts{\from{merlin.mbs}{%
-%  head,\MBopta}
-%\from{physjour.mbs}{\MBopta}
-%\from{geojour.mbs}{\MBopta}
-%\from{photjour.mbs}{\MBopta}
-%\from{merlin.mbs}{tail,\MBopta}}
-%\def\MBopta{%
-%  ay,%: Author-year with some non-standard interface
-%  nat,%: Natbib for use with natbib v5.3 or later
-%  lang,%: Use language field to switch hyphenation patterns for title
-%  pres,pres-bf,%: Presentation, speaker bold face 
-%  vonx,%: Sort without von part (de la Maire after Mahone)
-%  nm-rev1,%: Only first name reversed, initials (AGU style: Smith, J. F., H. K. Jones)
-%  jnrlst,%: Junior comes last as Smith, John, Jr.
-%  nmft,nmft-def,%: User defined author font (\bibnamefont)
-%  fnm-def,%: First names in user defined font (\bibfnamefont)
-%  nmfted,%: Editors incollection like authors font
-%  nmand-rm,%: `And' in normal font (JONES and JAMES)
-%  lab,lab-def,%: User defined citation font (\citenamefont)
-%  and-rm,%: Cited `and' in normal font 
-%  keyxyr,%: Year blank when KEY replaces missing author (for natbib 7.0)
-%  dt-beg,%: Date after authors 
-%  yr-par,%: Year in parentheses as (1993)
-%  dtrev,%: Date as year month 
-%  date-nil-x,%: If date is empty, then do not produce the surrounding punctuation (parens, brackets, colon, comma)
-%  tit-qq,%: Title and punctuation in double quotes (``Title,'' ..)
-%  inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook
-%  jtit-x,%: Title is ignored
-%  inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter just as in InBook
-%  article-booktitle,%: format booktitle 
-%  article-series,%: article can has series
-%  jttl-rm,%: Journal name normal font
-%  journal-address,%: Include address field (in parentheses) along with journal name
-%  book-bt,%: Field `booktitle', or if absent field `title', is book title 
-%  thesis-title-o,%: Title is optional: no warning issued if empty
-%  trtit-b,%: Tech. report title like books 
-%  techreport-institution-par,%: format tech report institution like book publisher
-%  vol-bf,%: Volume bold as {\bf vol}(num)
-%  vnum-sp,%: Journal vol (num) as 34 (2)
-%  volp-com,%: Volume with comma as vol(num), ppp
-%  jpg-1,%: Only start page number 
-%  pp-last,%: Pages at end but before any notes
-%  book-editor-booktitle,%: Book permits empty author, produces title before editor in this case
-%  inbook-editor-booktitle,%: Allow using both title/booktitle, both author/editor
-%  bookaddress,%: Italic booktitle followed by bookaddress in roman
-%  num-xser,%: Allows number without series and suppresses word "number"
-%  number-cap,%: Capitalize word `number' as: "Number 123"
-%  chapter-cap,%: Capitalize word `chapter' as: `Chapter 42'
-%  series-number,%: Series number as: `Springer Lecture Notes No. 125'
-%  numser-booktitle,%: After book title and conference address, and before editors 
-%  ser-vol,%: Series, vol. 23
-%  ser-rm,%: format series roman , even when used with volume
-%  volume-cap,%: Capitalize word `volume', as: `Volume 7 in Lecture Series'
-%  ser-ed,%: Series and volume after booktitle and before editors
-%  jnm-x,%: Space after journal name
-%  pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,%: As chapter and page: chapter 42, page 345
-%  pub-par,%: Publisher in parentheses 
-%  ay-empty-pub-parens-x,%: eliminate parentheses altogether if nothing inside
-%  pre-edn,%: Edition before publisher
-%  school-par,%: school/address in parens: `(school, address)' 
-%  isbn,%: Include ISBN for books, booklets, etc.
-%  issn,%: Include ISSN for periodicals
-%  doi-link,doi,%: Doi forms a link to the publication, anchored to the volume or title
-%  bkedcap,%: `Name Editor,' as above, editor upper case
-%  edby,%: In booktitle, edited by ..  (where .. is names)
-%  blk-com,%: Comma between blocks 
-%  fin-endbibitem,%: Command at end instead of period 
-%  pp,%: `Page' abbreviated as p. or pp.
-%  ed,%: `Editor' abbreviated as ed. or eds.
-%  abr,%: Abbreviations of such words
-%  ednx,%: `Edition' abbreviated as `ed' 
-%  ord,%: Numerical editions as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc
-%  jabr,%: Abbreviated journal names 
-%  and-com,%: Comma even with 2 authors as `Tom, and Harry'
-%  etal-it,%: Italic et al 
-%  revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,%: Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, url, translation
-%  SLACcitation,%: Produce SLACcitation field
-%  numpages-x,%: Do not include numpages field 
-%  url,url-prefix-x,%: URL without prefix (default: `URL ')
-%  bibinfo,%: Reference component tags like \bibinfo in the content of \bibitem
-%  bibfield,%: Element tags like \bibfield in the content of \bibitem
-%  nfss,%: Use LaTeX commands which may not work with Plain TeX
-%,{%
-%  }}
-%\generate{\file{apsrmp4-2.bst}{\MBopts}}
-%\endbatchfile
-% \end{verbatim}
-%
-% For a comparison between apsrmp.bst and apsrev.bst, see Section~\ref{sec:CompRevRmp}. 
-%
-% \changes{4.1c}{2008/08/15}{Document class option longbibliography via \cs{substyle@post}}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@bibstyle{apsrmp\substyle@post}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\authoryear@sw}
-% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
-% Author-year citations: default value of \cmd\authoryear@sw\ is true.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@booleantrue\authoryear@sw
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@rmp}
-% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}%
-% When the journal is RMP, the meaning of the procedure \cmd\@bibdataout@aps\ needs to be different 
-% because of the way the author names are formatted. In other respects, it is the same. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@bibdataout@aps{%
- \immediate\write\@bibdataout{%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% An entry that controls processing of the \filename{.bst} file has entry type \texttt{@CONTROL}. 
-% This entry's cite key is \texttt{apsrmp41Control}, which serves as a version number.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-  @CONTROL{%
-   apsrmp41Control%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Say whether we want long bibliography style (the default), or the abbreviated style. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-   \longbibliography@sw{%
-    ,author="03",editor="0",pages="1",title="0",year="0"%
-   }{%
-    ,author="0B",editor="0",pages="0",title="0",year="1"% TeXSupport
-   }%
-  }%
- }%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% Place a \cmd\citation\ into the auxiliary file corresponding to this entry. 
-%    \begin{macrocode}
- \if@filesw
-  \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{apsrmp41Control}}%
- \fi
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bibpunct}
-% \begin{macro}{\bibsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\bibpreamble}
-% \begin{macro}{\newblock}
-% \begin{macro}{\bibhang}
-% \begin{macro}{\bibsep}
-% \begin{macro}{\cite}
-% The following commands effectively establish the style in which \cmd\cite\ commands are
-% formatted.
-% You can think of them as the second needed component for the bibliography.
-% 
-% Set up for author-year citations:
-% when \cmd\NAT@set@cites\ executes (at \envb{document} time), the \cmd\@biblabel\ will
-% be set to \cmd\NAT@biblabel.
-%
-% Per Karie Friedman (friedman@phys.washington.edu), multiple citations are separated by semicolons, e.g., 
-% (Jones, 1999; Abbott and Smith, 2000; Wortley, 2001a), 
-% and 
-% multiple citations by the same author by commas, e.g., 
-% Abela et al. (1995, 1997a, 1997b).
-% The third argument of \cmd\bibpunct\ handles the former.
-%
-% The fifth argument puts a comma after the author when the year is not in parens:
-% (Lee et al., 1996).
-%
-% Incidently, this \cmd\bibpunct\ command specifies the \classname{natbib} default values. 
-%
-% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography.
-%
-% We change \classname{natbib}'s \cmd\NAT@def@citea\ procedure to effect more elaborate
-% punctuation for RMP: see item 473: 
-% \cmd\cite\ order punctuation: ``If possible, \cmd\textcite should put the word 'and' between two citations and before the last citation in a list of 3 or more.''
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\appdef\setup@hook{%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We define the punctuation to use in the \cmd\cite\ command's production.
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
- \bibpunct{(%)
- }{%(
- )}{;}{a}{,}{,}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography.
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
- \def\bibsection{%
-  \expandafter\section\expandafter*\expandafter{\refname}%
-  \@nobreaktrue
- }%
- \let\bibpreamble\@empty
- \def\newblock{\ }%
- \bibhang10\p@
- \bibsep\z@
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Per Mark Doyle, \cmd\cite\ is mapped to \cmd\citep\ in RMP.
-% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/23}{(AO, 541) Defer assignment of \cs{cite} until after natbib loads}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
- \let\cite\citep
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-% End of code to be delayed until after \classname{natbib} loads.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\footinbib@sw}
-% Footnotes in bibliography are consistent only with numbered citations,
-% and are particularly nasty under \classname{natbib}:
-% the packcage will automatically change to numbered references if
-% any \cmd\bibitem\ commands lack the optional argument.
-% Therefore, we must uninvoke it now, even if invoked by the document.
-% The same is quietly done with 
-% \classname{natbib}'s \classoption{mcite} and \classoption{compress} options. 
-% 
-% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/15}{(AO, 523) Add class option nomerge, to turn off new natbib 8.3 syntax}
-% (AO 523) I changed the code that alters \cmd\NAT@merge\ so that it will not override
-% when \cmd\NAT@merge\ has been set to \cmd\z@.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\@booleanfalse\footinbib@sw
-\appdef\setup@hook{%
- \footinbib@sw{%
-  \class@warn{%
-   Footnotes in bibliography are incompatible with RMP.^^J%
-   Undoing the footinbib option.
-  }%
-  \@booleanfalse\footinbib@sw
- }{}%
- \@ifnum{\NAT@merge>\@ne}{\let\NAT@merge\@ne}{}%
- \def\NAT@cmprs{\z@}%
-}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\eprint}
-% RMP requires the \cmd\eprint\ field in the bib entry to be set off with the word ``eprint''.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\eprint#1{eprint #1}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Table of Contents}
-%
-% We set up for auto-sizing of certain TOC elements.
-% 
-% To do this, we override the definitions for 
-% the default TOC font (\cmd\toc@@font),
-% and define
-% formatting for the needed elements (\cmd\l@\dots).
-% Finally, we activate the autosizing by 
-% assigning \cmd\toc@pre\ and \cmd\toc@post.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\toc@@font}
-% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 461) Change the csname revtex uses from @dotsep to ltxu@dotsep. The former is understood in mu. (What we wanted was a dimension.)}%
-% Set the formatting characteristics of the auto-indenting part
-%  of the TOC.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\toc@@font{%
- \footnotesize\rmfamily
- \def\\{\space\ignorespaces}%
-}%
-\def\ltxu@dotsep{5.5pt}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\l@section}
-% Determine which TOC elements are automatically indented.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\def\tocleft@{\z@}%
-\def\tocdim@min{5\p@}%
-\def\l@section{%
- \l@@sections{}{section}% Implicit #3#4
-}%
-\def\l@subsection{%
- \l@@sections{section}{subsection}% Implicit #3#4
-}%
-\def\l@subsubsection{%
- \l@@sections{subsection}{subsubsection}% Implicit #3#4
-}%
-%\def\l@subsubsection#1#2{}%
-\def\l@paragraph#1#2{}%
-\def\l@subparagraph#1#2{}%
-%    \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Activate the TOC processing.
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-\let\toc@pre\toc@pre@auto
-\let\toc@post\toc@post@auto
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%</rmp>
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \Finale
-% %Here ends the programmer's documentation.
-% \endinput
-%
-\endinput
-- 
cgit v1.3

